JP7387491B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

Conventional gaming machines can execute a battle effect and a timer effect at the same time as a reach effect, and during a battle effect, it is also possible to execute a slow motion effect that slows down the playback speed of the battle effect. There are some (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2017-99801A

However, in Patent Document 1, there was room for improvement in slow motion effects.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can impress upon a player that the machine is controlled in an advantageous state .

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
sound output means;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
The display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The specific performance is
The display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is announced as a performance result. including,
The performance execution means is
In the first display area, the effect video can be displayed,
In the second display area, information regarding the game can be displayed;
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area,
In the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
In the third period,
When notifying an advantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area and the second display area are used to inform the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period. It is possible to notify the performance results in an advantageous manner,
When notifying a disadvantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area is used to notify the disadvantageous performance result while the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period is displayed. It is possible and
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means may be emitted at shorter intervals than in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode,
It is possible to perform a group effect that displays an image of multiple characters progressing as a group,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the initially displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation appears in which part of the displayed character is displayed,
There is a first stage and a second stage with different production backgrounds,
The performance execution means is
When executing the group effect in the first stage, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a predetermined number of frames;
When executing the group effect in the second stage, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a specific number of frames different from a predetermined number of frames;
the degree of expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state when the group effect is executed in the first stage; the degree of expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state when the group effect is executed in the second stage; are different,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to impress on the player that the control is in an advantageous state.
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player when a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A performance execution means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Crowd preview performance) and
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the initially displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation occurs in which a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 57 and 94)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to execute group effects more suitably.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of executing a group effect in which images of a plurality of characters and objects appear, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-050851. However, in such gaming machines, it is possible to enjoy the fun of the game by executing group effects, but there is still room for improvement regarding such group effects, and in consideration of this point, it is possible to enjoy the fun of the game. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can suitably execute a group performance.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player when a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the initially displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation occurs in which a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 57 and 94)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, group effects can be executed more suitably.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing rotating display of a hold display in each hold display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a subtitle in a subtitle display area. , (D) is a diagram showing the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of a chance up effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns for still image display performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of operation promotion performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for explaining a frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating a special figure LED board and a 4th pattern unit. It is a diagram looking into between a game board and an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. installed in a pachinko game machine. It is a figure for explaining a hit type. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each random number. It is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a production control command. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a loss. It is a diagram for explaining a post-change pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a previous variation pattern determination table. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the sub side. It is a figure for explaining the lottery table in each preview presentation. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a group advance notice work process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of this video production process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overall picture of a six-person group preview. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an auxiliary display used in a group preview performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining motion blur processing used in group preview presentation. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the form of outlines when characters overlap in a group preview performance. It is a diagram looking into the space between the game board and the image display device during execution of the group preview performance. It is a diagram showing the whole picture of the Bakuchu group preview. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a change in volume and a brightness data table in a group preview performance. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of a six-person group notice in stage A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of a Bakuchu group notice in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the group preview luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for accessory lamps in a group preview luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the group preview luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the group preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the group preview luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in a reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of a child table in a reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in the reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for accessory lamps in the reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for board left lamps in the reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for on-board lamps in the reach line brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for attacker lamps in the reach line brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background preview brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for accessory lamps in a background notice luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the background preview luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during full lighting. It is a figure for explaining an example of a brightness data table at the time of PUSH effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview brightness data table according to a modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a group preview luminance data table according to a modification. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a six-person group preview is executed on stage A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode of a comparative example when a six-person group preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode when a background preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a lamp preview is executed at stage A. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode at stage A. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the final reach. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the production mode at stage B. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the production mode when a Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group preview is executed at stage A. It is a figure for explaining the detail of Boingo group notice. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode of a comparative example when a Boingo group preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a presentation mode of a comparative example when a Boingo group preview is executed in stage A. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a performance mode when a Boingo group notice according to a modification is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when a dog group notice according to a modified example is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when a dog group notice according to a modified example is executed. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of a six-person group notice and a dog group notice. It is a figure for explaining the performance mode when the group preview performance is executed during the reach line. It is a figure for explaining the performance mode when the group preview performance is executed during the reach line.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A form for implementing a pachinko gaming machine, which is a gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described below based on an example.

[form]
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A performance execution means (for example, Production control CPU 120),
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM and sound effects are output at the normal playback speed of V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The sound output means includes a reproduction circuit for reproducing sound (for example, IC079SG132 for voice synthesis), an amplification circuit for amplifying the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit (for example, amplification circuit 079SG134), and a sound that is amplified by the amplification circuit. The device is characterized in that it includes speakers (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) that output sound.
According to this feature, highly reproducible performance sound can be output from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or Form 2,
The performance execution means is capable of outputting a speed related to a performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance by the sound output means during a predetermined period in the second period at the same speed as in the first period; In a specific period after the period, the sound output means can output at a speed different from the first period (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the second reach effect, etc.) can be output at a speed different from the first period. In the first half of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance of the 3rd reach performance and the 4th reach performance, the speaker is used as in the first half of the execution period of each reach performance of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance. While the production sound is output from 8L and 8R at the playback speed V4, in the second half of the execution period of the second half of each reach production of the 1st reach production, 2nd reach production, 3rd reach production, and 4th reach production, the playback speed is V4. (For example, the part where the production sound is output at a playback speed different from the playback speed V4 (for example, playback speed V5 slower than V4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the speed of the effect sound can be made different for a specific period within the second period in which the effect video is displayed at the second speed, so it is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
The production sound corresponding to the predetermined production includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion where BGM (music) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the game's interest through the performance sound including music and sound effects.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 4,
comprising a light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light and changing the light emission mode at least in the first period and the second period;
The effect execution means is capable of changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in the second period at a shorter cycle than the first period (for example, in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, As shown in 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and the second half of the fourth reach performance, each execution period of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance and the fourth reach performance (The part where the game effect lamp 9 flashes at a shorter cycle than the execution period of the first half of the reach effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the change cycle of the light emitting mode of the light emitting means becomes shorter (faster) in the second period when the speed of progress of the performance is slow, thereby improving the performance effect of the second period.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
The display areas that can display the effect animation include a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area that is closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
A predetermined effect (e.g., reach effect) in which an effect animation of a character is displayed in the first display area and an effect sound is outputted by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the effect animation of the character; Information display that operates the information display related to the variable display (for example, rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B), 2(C); moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
Regarding the information presentation, it is possible to perform an information presentation in which the information display operates at the same operating speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIGS. 10-19 to 10- 25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect, the rotating display of the hold display is rotated at the rotation speed V3. , the part where the movement of the caption is displayed at the movement speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, but the operating speed of the information display and the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance change between the first period and the second period. Since it does not change from period to period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine described in Form 6,
The total area of the first display area is larger than the total area of the second display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the area of the second display area 079SG005Sa). (a portion wider than the combined area of the area and the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to more easily recognize the predetermined presentation than the information presentation, thereby improving the player's enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine described in Form 6 or Form 7,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an information effect in which the information display always operates at the same operating speed during at least a variable display period other than the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. -18 to Figure 10-25, during the period other than during the reach effect, the rotating display of the pending display is executed at rotation speed V3 in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop In display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the caption is executed at movement speed V3)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the operating speed of information display does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 6 to 8,
The information presentation is a moving display presentation that sequentially moves and displays information indicating the state of the presentation in the variable display being executed in the second display area (for example, a moving display of a message according to the gaming state in the telop display area 079SG005T). ),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a moving display effect that moves and displays the information display so that at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C)). As shown, the characters included in the message in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time they are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T and move to the left again. (the part that is moved towards the right)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the moving display effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, an amplifier circuit 079SG134) mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), and a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance) that informs whether or not a privilege will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined performance. ,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
Within the second period, it is possible to perform an effect production that is different from the predetermined production and that enhances the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and As shown in 10-28, the part that executes the effect production of displaying concentrated lines on the image display device 5 during the second half execution period of the second reach effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, to enhance the performance effect of the second period, and to make the players aware that the second period has ended and the notification performance will be executed through the effect performance. It's easy to do.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The performance execution means is
The effect production may be performed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of effectiveness for enhancing the production effect of the predetermined production (for example, a mode in which concentrated lines are displayed as shown in FIG. 10-28(C), and a mode as shown in FIG. 10-28(D)). As shown in FIG.
As the second period progresses from the start point to the end point, it is possible to execute the effect production in a manner in which the degree of effectiveness of enhancing the production effect increases sequentially (for example, FIG. 10-28(C) and FIG. 10-28( As shown in D), the number of concentrated lines increases as the battle progresses.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the mode of the effect production changes to a mode in which the degree of effectiveness of enhancing the production effect of the predetermined production increases sequentially, the effect production notifies the player that the notification production will be executed when the second period ends. This makes it easier for people to recognize the information.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 11,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
The display areas that can display the effect animation include a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area that is closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect), a notification effect that informs whether or not a benefit will be awarded after execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a jackpot notification effect and a loss notification effect), and specific information related to the variable display in the second display area. Effects (for example, rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B), or in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C)) a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a moving display of a subtitle;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video whose performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the first half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of each of the 1st reach effect, 2nd reach effect, 3rd reach effect, and 4th reach effect, the progress speed of the video of each reach effect is (portion displayed on the image display device 5 at V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, FIG. 10-26(G), FIG. 10-29(E), FIG. 10-30(D), As shown in FIG. 10-31 (G) and FIG. 10-35 (C), when the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination as a jackpot notification effect, the jackpot is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. (The part that displays the image of the notification effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by executing the notification effect in a wide display area that combines the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to notify the player that a privilege has been awarded. It can be easily recognized by players.

Form 13 is the gaming machine according to form 12,
The performance execution means is
A first display that operates within the second display area (for example, a hold display) and a second display that does not operate within the second display area (for example, a first hold storage display area 079SG005D and a second hold storage display area 079SG005U) ) can be displayed in the specific information presentation,
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area where the first display and the second display are erased (for example, FIG. 10-26(G), FIG. 10-29(E), FIG. 10-30 As shown in (D), Figure 10-31 (G), and Figure 10-35 (C), when executing the jackpot notification effect, the hold display, the first hold memory display area 079SG005D, and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification effect is executed in the second display area where not only the first display that operates but also the second display that does not operate is erased, thereby further increasing the visibility of the notification effect in the second display area. be able to.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
As display areas that can display the effect animation, a first display area (for example, first display area 079SG005F), a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, second display area 079SG005Sa), A display means (for example, image display device 5) including
A benefit granting means (for example, the CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach performance), a notification performance that notifies whether or not a benefit will be awarded after execution of the predetermined performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a miss notification performance), and an information performance related to variable display in the second display area. (For example, the rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 10-2(B), or the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C) A production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can execute
Equipped with
The display means can change the visibility of the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in modification 079SG-2, in addition to the first display area 079SG005F, the second display area a portion that can reduce the visibility of the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb),
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video whose performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the first half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of each of the 1st reach effect, 2nd reach effect, 3rd reach effect, and 4th reach effect, the progress speed of the video of each reach effect is (portion displayed on the image display device 5 at V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
During the pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined performance to the execution of the notification performance, the visibility of the first display area changes, but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, modification 079SG -2, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by changing the visibility of the first display area during the pre-notification period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect is executed. Since the visibility of the second display area does not change, it is also possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information presentation.

Form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 14,
The display means is a means capable of generating an image to be displayed, and includes a first drawing layer (for example, second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area, and a first drawing layer from the first drawing layer. is an upper drawing layer, and includes a second drawing layer (e.g., first image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the second display area. control unit 123);
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image drawn by the image generation means in the first drawing layer (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-2, the visibility of the image drawn in the first drawing layer is changed by the second image data (a portion that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea that is drawn as an image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, only the visibility of the first display area can be accurately changed without changing the visibility of the second display area.

Form 16 is the gaming machine according to Form 15,
The image generation means adjusts the visibility of the image to be drawn in the first drawing hierarchy from a specific position away from an area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing hierarchy to an area corresponding to the second display area. (For example, as shown in modification example 079SG-2, the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of the second image data is moved from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa. (The part that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing in an enlarged manner toward the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the first drawing layer changes over a predetermined period from a specific position to an area corresponding to the second display area. The visibility of the area can be made difficult to change.

Form 17 is a gaming machine according to any one of Forms 14 to 16,
Equipped with a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
The performance execution means is
The notification effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's movement by the movement detection means (for example, the jackpot game state is controlled based on the player's operation of the push button 31B, or the jackpot game (a part that can notify that it is not controlled by the state),
It is possible to execute a motion promotion performance (for example, an operation promotion performance) that prompts a player to perform a motion by displaying a motion promotion image in the first display area for executing the notification performance;
Although the visibility of the performance video of the predetermined performance decreases, the visibility of the action promotion performance does not decrease (for example, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F decreases due to the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F decreases, but The visibility of the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and meter 079SG005M displayed as data images does not decrease)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the motion promotion performance stand out from the predetermined performance, so that it is possible to effectively encourage the player to perform the motion.

Form 18 is a gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying identification information in a variable manner and capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
The display areas that can display the effect animation include a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 10-2(A)) and a second display area that is closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, , second display area 079SG005Sa);
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, reach effect), an information effect that notifies whether or not a benefit will be awarded after the end of the predetermined effect, and an information effect that operates an information display related to the variable display in the second display area (for example, FIG. 10- Rotating display of the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SG005D and second pending storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 2(B), and moving display of the subtitle in the subtitle display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C)) A possible production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120),
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video whose performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the first half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, As shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of each of the 1st reach effect, 2nd reach effect, 3rd reach effect, and 4th reach effect, the progress speed of the video of each reach effect is (portion displayed on the image display device 5 at V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
A pre-notification performance that displays a specific still image corresponding to a stoppage of the progress of the predetermined performance being executed in the first display area during a pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined performance to the execution of the notification performance. (For example, still image display effect)
The information display operation in the second display area continues even during the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, even during the still image display performance execution period, the first pending The rotating display of the pending display in the storage display area 079SG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and the part where the moving display of the subtitle continues in the subtitle display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 10-2(C))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by displaying the specific still image in the first display area during the pre-notification period, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed. In addition, since the information display operation in the second display area continues, it is possible to prevent the information presentation from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation stopping.

Form 19 is the gaming machine according to Form 18,
The specific still image is an image obtained by changing the color of the still image of the predetermined effect whose progress has been stopped (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 and 10-29(A) to 10-29(B)). As shown, the color of the still image is inverted when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area has a different color from the still image of the predetermined effect, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the notification effect is being executed.

Form 20 is the gaming machine according to form 19,
Regarding the image of the information effect displayed in the second display area, the color does not change during the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), the still image display effect is pattern SG- 2, the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted, but the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the color of the still image displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are inverted. (The color of the 4th pattern is not reversed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information performance when the pre-announcement performance is executed (the color of the information performance image does not change, so if the color changes (This makes it easier to recognize that it is a specific still image.)

Form 21 is a gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
A display means capable of displaying a directed video (for example, an image display device 5),
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), and a performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance) that informs whether or not a privilege will be awarded after the execution of the predetermined performance.
Equipped with
The predetermined performance includes a first section (for example, a first reach performance and a third reach performance) and a second section after the first section (for example, a second reach performance and a fourth reach performance),
The first section and the second section each refer to the first period (for example, the first half execution period of the first reach effect, the first half execution period of the second reach effect, the first half execution period of the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect). (first half performance period) and a second period after the first period (for example, first reach performance second half execution period, second reach performance second half execution period, third reach performance second half execution period, fourth reach performance second half execution period) including the second half of the reach performance (execution period),
The performance execution means is
In the first period, it is possible to display on the display means an effect video in which the progress speed of the effect is a first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, the first reach effect, the first reach effect, etc. During the execution period of the first half of each of the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In the second period, it is possible to display on the display means an effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is at a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25). , a portion where the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. ),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
A first pattern in which the predetermined effect is transferred to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, the variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21, or the variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25) and a second pattern that ends without moving to the second section after execution of the first section (for example, the super reach shown in FIGS. 10-18 and 10-19). The present invention is characterized in that it can be executed by variable display of α1 and super reach α2, and variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2 shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23).
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, the predetermined effect can be executed at the second speed in the first section and then move to the second section, or the predetermined effect can be executed without moving to the second section. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game ends and whether or not the predetermined performance is executed at the second speed in the second section and a bonus is awarded, the game's interest can be improved.

Form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The performance execution means is
A termination suggestion effect that suggests that the predetermined effect ends in the first section without moving to the second section (for example, when an ally character is defeated by an enemy character).
The end suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when transitioning from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progress speed (for example, Fig. 10-19, Fig. 10-20, Fig. 10-21 , as shown in FIGS. 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance and the second half of the third reach performance, the production in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and the first (a part in which the second half of the reach performance execution period or the second half execution period of the third reach performance is executed at the progress speed V1),
When notifying that a privilege will be given in the notification performance, it is possible to display a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is at a third speed in the first notification period of the notification performance on the display means, and In a second notification period that is later than the first notification period, an effect video having a fourth speed slower than the third speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 10-18, FIG. 10-20, FIG. -22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-25, Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 ( B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure 10-35 (C), as shown in The part that displays the video when the enemy character collapses due to the attack being hit at the progress speed V2),
When notifying that no benefits will be given in the notification performance, the performance video at the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the performance video at the fourth speed during the second notification period. (For example, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10 -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G), and Figures 10-35 (D) to 10-35 (F), the videos of when a friendly character collapses. (The part where the display is executed at the progress speed V1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the progressing speed of the predetermined performance when moving to the second section is the same as the progressing speed of the end-suggesting performance, the progressing speed when moving to the second section is the same as the progressing speed of the end-suggesting performance. By being different, it is possible to prevent expectations for the award of the benefit from becoming excessively high, and when it is announced that the benefit will not be awarded, the 4th speed performance video will not be displayed. It is also possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from increasing excessively, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), a movement promotion effect (for example, operation promotion effect) that encourages the player to perform a movement, and a notification effect (for example, , a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
When the performance video of the predetermined performance is being displayed at the second speed in the second period, the movement promotion performance can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, 4. The part where the operation promotion performance is executed when the video display of the reach performance is being executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the reach performance)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, since the predetermined presentation progresses at the second speed while the movement promotion presentation is being executed during the second period, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the predetermined presentation. can.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to Form 23,
The movement promotion effect includes a valid detection period notification effect (for example, a display of a meter 079SG005M indicating an operation inheritance period of the push button 31B) for notifying a valid detection period during which the detection of the player's movement by the movement detection means is accepted. ,
When the effective detection period ends, the performance execution means detects that the movement of the player is detected by the movement detection means within the effective detection period from a timing later than the end of the effective detection period. It is possible to perform the same notification effect as in the case of push (The part that executes the same jackpot notification performance or loss notification performance based on the end of the operation reception period for the button 31B or the player's operation of the push button 31B)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, if the motion detection means does not detect the player's motion, the notification effect is not executed before the effective detection period has elapsed, so the motion detection means detects the player's motion. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the benefit will be awarded during the validity detection period.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 24,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video,
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance) that informs whether or not a privilege will be awarded after the end of the predetermined performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
When notifying that a privilege will be given in the notification performance, it is possible to display a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is at a third speed in the first notification period of the notification performance on the display means, and In a second notification period that is later than the first notification period, an effect video having a fourth speed slower than the third speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 10-18, FIG. 10-20, FIG. -22, Figure 10-24 and Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) to Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) to Figure 10 -30(D), Figures 10-31(E) to 10-31(G), and Figures 10-35(A) to 10-35C), in the jackpot notification performance, the attack of an ally character The part of the video where the character hits the enemy character is displayed at a progressing speed of V1, while the part of the video where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progressing speed of V2).
When notifying that no benefits will be given in the notification performance, the performance video at the third speed can be displayed on the display means without displaying the performance video at the fourth speed during the second notification period. (For example, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10 As shown in -30 (H), Figures 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G), and Figures 10-35 (D) to 10-35 (F), the video of the failure notification effect is moving at the same speed as the progress speed. (Part displayed in V1)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, when the award of a benefit is announced as a notification effect, a performance video with the progress speed at the fourth speed is displayed, so that the benefit is awarded. It is possible to impress upon the player what has been done by the performance video of the notification performance.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to Form 25,
The effect executing means executes a special effect (for example, a still image display effect in which the color of the still image is inverted (pattern SG-16) as shown in FIG. 10-16) during the second period only when a privilege is given. A game machine characterized by being capable of performing the still image display performance (2)).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special effect will be executed.

The gaming machine of Form 27 is the gaming machine according to Form 26,
The benefit granting means provides a first benefit (for example, a jackpot game state with a non-probability variable jackpot) and a second benefit (for example, a jackpot game state with a probability variable jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit. It is possible to grant
The performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance (for example, a revival performance shown in Modified Example 079SG-4) that notifies that a benefit will be provided after once notifying that the benefit will not be provided in the notification performance. ,
When the special performance is executed during the second period and the notification performance informs that a benefit will be awarded, the second benefit is awarded (for example, as shown in Modification 079SG-4, When the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 and the jackpot notification effect is executed, the part that is controlled to a jackpot game state with a probability variable jackpot),
When the special performance is performed during the second period and after the notification performance informs that no benefits will be awarded, the first benefit or the second benefit is granted. (For example, as shown in modification 079SG-4, if the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the failure notification effect is executed once, and then the resurrection effect is executed, the jackpot is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Some parts are controlled in a gaming state and others are controlled in a jackpot gaming state with a probability of variable jackpot.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, after the special performance is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the award of a benefit will be announced in the notification performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 28 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 27,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A sound output means capable of outputting performance sounds (for example, a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an audio data ROM079SG133, and an amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L and 8R and the voice control board 13);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a directed video;
A benefit granting means (for example, CPU 103) that grants a benefit (for example, a jackpot gaming state);
a motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player;
A predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that a privilege will be given by displaying a performance video of a character on the display means and outputting a performance sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the performance video of the character. ), a first movement promotion image (for example, operation promotion image 079SG005Ba), and a second movement promotion image different from the first movement promotion image (for example, operation promotion image 079SG005Bb). A movement promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion effect) that displays on the display means to encourage the player to perform a movement, and a judgment as to whether or not a privilege is given based on the detection of the player's movement by the movement detection means. A performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification performance to be notified (for example, a jackpot notification performance and a loss notification performance);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
During the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach During the execution period of the first half of each of the performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed V1),
In a second period of the predetermined performance after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, in FIG. -19 ~ As shown in Figure 10-25, the video of each reach effect reaches the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect. (the part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output at the normal playback speed of V4),
The operation promotion effect can be executed after the start of the second period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect) part),
When performing the movement promotion effect using the first movement promotion image, the first movement promotion image is displayed while visually displaying the effect animation of the predetermined effect on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33). As shown, when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the effect image 079SG005E having transparency is also displayed, so the player can see the battle performance through the effect image 079SG005E).
When performing the movement promotion effect using the second movement promotion image, the display means displays the effect animation of the predetermined effect in a manner that makes it more difficult to see than the first movement promotion image. , the second operation promotion image is displayed in a display area wider than the display area of the first operation promotion image (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-34, operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is larger in size than operation promotion image 079SG005Ba). When displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, the transparency of the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is 0%, so the visibility of the battle performance is lower than when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed),
The rate at which benefits are given when the second operation promotion image is displayed is higher than when the first operation promotion image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb The rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when is displayed is lower than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change between the first period and the second period. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first movement promotion image and the second movement promotion image is displayed as the movement promotion effect. You can improve your interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of Form 29 is the gaming machine according to Form 28,
The effect executing means is capable of displaying an effect moving image of the predetermined effect whose progress speed is the second speed on the display means while the first movement promotion image is being displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, FIG. 10-25 and FIGS. 10-33(C) to 10-33(E), when displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba as the operation promotion effect, while the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the battle effect (The part where the presentation video is displayed at the progress speed V2)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, since the performance moving image of the predetermined performance is displayed at the second speed while the first movement promotion image is being displayed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 29,
The performance execution means is
As the predetermined effects, a first predetermined effect (for example, a first reach effect and a third reach effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect) can be performed, and the first After the execution of the first specific section (for example, the first half execution period of the first reach effect and the first half execution period of the third reach effect) in the predetermined effect, the second specific section after the first specific section (for example, the first reach effect) is executed. It is possible to transition to the second half of the performance period and the second half of the third reach performance),
A first specific pattern (for example, super reach α1 shown in FIG. 10-18) in which the predetermined effect is notified of the granting of a benefit without moving to the second specific section after the first specific section of the first predetermined effect is executed. and a variable display of super reach β1 shown in FIG. , the variable display of the super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 and the super reach β3 shown in FIGS. 10-24 and 10-25), the first specific section of the first predetermined effect and the first A third specific pattern (for example, the variable display of super reach α2 shown in FIG. 10-19 or the variable display of super reach β2 shown in FIG. 10-23) that ends the predetermined effect after execution with the second specific section, is feasible and
both when transitioning from the first specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second specific section and when transitioning from the second specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second predetermined performance. A performance video whose progress speed is the second speed is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, from the execution period of the first half of the first reach performance to the second half of the first reach performance) When transitioning to the execution period, When transitioning from the first half of the first reach performance to the first half of the second reach performance, When transitioning from the first half of the third reach performance to the second half of the third reach performance , when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the fourth reach performance, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound is output at the same speed in both the first specific section and the second specific section of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect. (For example, as shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25, when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach effect to the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second half execution period of the first reach effect changes When transitioning to the execution period of the first half of the reach performance, When transitioning from the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance, From the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance (The part where BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at playback speed V4, same as in other periods)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes when transitioning from the first specific section to the second specific section of the first predetermined performance, and when transitioning from the second specific section to the second predetermined performance. However, since the output speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance does not change when transitioning from the first specific section of the first predetermined performance to the second specific section or from the second specific section to the second predetermined performance, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and furthermore, by changing the progressing speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance to the second speed, the player can easily recognize the branching of the predetermined performance.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc., are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 079SG)
Next, the feature section 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained. FIG. 10-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the audio control board 13 in the feature section 079SG has an audio synthesis board that works together with the performance control CPU 120 to generate sounds (performance sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is equipped with an IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 that amplifies the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and an audio data ROM079SG133. Based on the production control command, the sound number data is output to the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and the voice synthesis IC079SG132 generates a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the performance control CPU 120, the sound synthesis IC079SG132 generates sounds and sound effects for each of the speakers 8L and 8R individually according to the input sound number data, and sends them to the amplifier circuit 079SG134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and outputs the amplified sound to each speaker 8L and 8R.

The audio data ROM079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting a sound corresponding to the performance executed by the performance command to which the sound number data corresponds in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data include the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including audio data etc. described in chronological order.

FIG. 10-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature section 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in the feature portion 079SG is formed into a rectangular shape with a height L and a width L from side to side when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols, a ready-to-reach effect, an operation promotion effect described later, and a still image display effect. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reservation storage display area 079SG005D in which the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed by the number of reservation displays in an outlined circle, and a second reservation storage number of special symbols can be displayed in white. A second display area 079SG005Sa is configured including a second hold storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed depending on the number of circular hold displays, and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop that indicates the gaming status.

That is, a portion of the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

Note that the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display game-related information (pending display, telop display, fourth symbol This is the display area where the number of reserved memories is displayed. In other words, the second display area 079SG005Sa and third display area 079SG005Sb in the feature section 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 displays a fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol pending memory number, and a display of the second special symbol pending memory number. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. Further, the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and horizontal width are extremely shorter than the height H and the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. There is.

Therefore, in this feature section 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F occupying the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 10-2(B), in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pending display operation process (see FIG. 8-13), which will be described later. As a result, each pending display can be displayed rotating around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotational speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 10-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the performance control CPU 120 executes the telop operation process (see FIG. 10-13), which will be described later, so that the telop display area 079SG005T changes according to the gaming state and the performance being executed. A message (for example, if a specific reach effect is in progress, a message according to the state of the effect such as "In XX mode!") is moved from the left to the right at a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3). It can be displayed simultaneously.

Furthermore, when the characters included in the message according to the gaming state reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and the display ends, they are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and are moved from the left to the right again. be moved in a direction. Therefore, when a message corresponding to the gaming state is being moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the gaming state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is now easier to recognize the current gaming status.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a form is provided in which the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display in the first hold memory display area 079SG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are at different constant speeds. It may also be possible to rotate and move.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb alternately flash at a constant cycle. This indicates that special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, for these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb, if the variable display result is a loss, both will be turned off (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result will be a jackpot or a loss. In this case, both lights are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

In addition, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are based on the timing at which a new pending memory occurs and the timing at which a new variable display starts. This is a display in which only the number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. , unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the feature section 079SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), image data 1 displays the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and displays the fourth This is data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display a small pattern of the image data 1 decorative pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), image data 2 is data drawn to display images of a chance-up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 10-3(C), image data 3 is data drawn to display a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), these image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying the images on the image display device 5. is set. As for the display priority, image data 1 is set to the highest and image data 3 is set to the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1 > image data 2 > image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. The image is displayed as a lower layer (lowest layer) image than the image based on image data 1 and the image based on image data 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 2 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3, and an image based on image data 1 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3. The image based on image data 2 and the image based on image data 3 are displayed with priority.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-3(D), when an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3 are displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time, image data 3 Since the image based on the image data 3 is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partially difficult to see or become invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, although details will be described later, images based on image data 1 and image data 2 are always displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is constant, while images based on image data 3 The image based on the image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image or a still image at a plurality of advancing speeds based on data stored in the CGROM in advance.

In particular, with this feature section 079SG, the details will be described later, but during the super reach reach effect, the video of the reach effect can be displayed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It becomes. This is because the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 and the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on this data, a part of the effect video for the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may also be possible to display it.

In this way, in this feature section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the performance video changes, to V1, the non-slow motion period, where the progress speed of the ready-to-reach performance perceived by the player is the fast first speed, and the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, a slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-win effect that the player recognizes is a second speed. In other words, a slow-motion video that is a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance in this feature section 079SG is slow is that the video progresses compared to a non-slow-motion video whose video progress speed is V1, which is displayed before the slow-motion video. It is fine as long as it is slow.

Note that this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects (see Figures 10-18 to 10-25), but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, for example, the content of the effect video displayed on the image display device 5 as a super reach effect is the same as the content of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, but the video progress speed By executing a super reach performance that does not change from V1 to V2, that is, a slow motion period, the super reach performance shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25 becomes a slow motion period. It may be made easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, when performing a super reach effect in which the content of the effect video is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect video at the second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention This means that by displaying a video with the same content at a video progression speed V2 that is slower than the video progression speed V1 in a non-slow-motion super reach performance, The displayed performance video corresponds to this.

As described above, this feature section 079SG configures a slow-motion effect in which the progress speed of the reach effect felt by the player is slow by slowing down the video progress speed of the effect video, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is Although the output of the output does not change from the playback speed V3, the present invention is not limited to this. By conversely speeding up the playback speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission period of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion that makes the player feel that the progress speed of the ready-to-reach performance has slowed down may be constructed.

In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG is equipped with a plurality of performance output means including a display means capable of displaying a performance video, and the speed of progress of the performance by at least one performance output means among these performance output means. Any technique may be used as long as it can make the player recognize that the performance being executed is slow motion during the slow motion period by making the difference between the slow motion period and the non-slow motion period.

Note that this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the display of the reach effect animation is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may be such that the progress speed of the display of the reach effect animation can be changed (for example, the progress speed may gradually decrease over time, or the progress speed may increase or decrease within a predetermined range).

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 079SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit", as shown in Figure 10-4 (B), for example. Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that notifies that the jackpot is in an open state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 10-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this feature section 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 079SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 shows variable display results in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table being referenced.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more judgment values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 079SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 10-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 079SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows an example of the structure of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 079SG determines whether the jackpot type is one of multiple types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is decided to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "jackpot". This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 079SG using FIG. 10-7(B), in this feature section 079SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, only the time saving control is executed and the state changes to a low probability high base state. A transitional “non-probable jackpot” is set.

The jackpot game state based on "probable variable jackpot A" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). The jackpot game state based on the "probable variable jackpot B" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds). The jackpot game state based on the "probable variable jackpot C" is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed in two rounds (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds). Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. The "non-probable variable jackpot" is sometimes referred to as the 2-round (2R) non-probable variable jackpot.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in this feature section 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this feature part 079SG). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high-precision control and time-saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming states of Probable Variable Jackpot A, Probable Variable Jackpot B, and Probable Variable Jackpot C are continuously executed until a jackpot occurs again after the corresponding jackpot gaming state ends. . Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 10-7 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a special game or not, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a definite jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 10-8 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 079SG. In this feature part 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although this feature section 079SG provides only one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. are provided. It may be provided. Furthermore, a plurality of super reach variation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . .

Incidentally, the variation patterns in this feature section 079SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small win".

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 079SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. Then, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and the random number MR3 for determining the type of variation may be provided. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random number value, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 079SG. In this feature section 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-5 (Super Reach β3 jackpot fluctuation pattern). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the corresponding jackpot variation pattern determination table A to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot). (variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the numbers of determination values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5 are different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5. In other words, in this feature section 079SG, when the variable display result is a variable jackpot, the percentage of PB1-3 and PB1-4, which are the super reach β system variation patterns, is higher than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. Since the variation pattern in the variable display is determined as follows, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and select the corresponding Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern determination table C for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α2 deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach α3 deviation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is off) and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 079SG is "off", the special figure is The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-8, the reach performance of Super Reach α1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. This is a reach performance where the display result is a jackpot, and the reach performance of Super Reach α2 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-2) executes the first half and the second half of the first reach performance, which will be described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is off after the change, and the reach effect of Super Reach α3 (the reach effect executed with the variable display in variable pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach effect described later. This is a ready-to-win performance in which a second ready-to-win performance, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the second half of the performance are executed, and the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss.

As for the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in Figures 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3, the percentage of the variable display result being a jackpot after being executed up to the second reach effect is the percentage when the first reach effect is executed. The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, the reach performance of Super Reach β1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-4) is a reach performance in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot after the first half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. Yes, the reach performance of Super Reach β2 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-4) has a variable display result that is off after the first half and the second half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, are executed. This is a reach performance, and the reach performance of Super Reach β3 (the reach performance executed with variable display in variable pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third reach performance, which will be described later. After that, a fourth ready-to-win presentation, which will be described later, is further executed, and the variable display result is a ready-to-win presentation in which the result is a jackpot or a loss.

Regarding the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5, as shown in Figures 10-8 and 10-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable displays of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5, the percentage of variable display results that are executed up to the 4th reach effect and the variable display result becomes a jackpot is The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the second reach effect is always performed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect is always executed after the third reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the second ready-to-win performance and the fourth ready-to-win performance may be executed alone.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, during variable display, each reach effect can be executed in combination of the first reach effect and the second reach effect, and can be executed in combination with the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect. Although possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the reach effects may be combined with combinations other than these combinations (for example, the first reach effect and the fourth reach effect, the second reach effect and the third reach effect). A case may also be provided in which this is executed in combination with a reach effect, etc.).

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, as shown in Figure 10-9, the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally the same as those of the super reach α system. The proportion of variable display results that become jackpots (jackpot expectation level) is set higher than the variation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3). Although not limited to, some of the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach β series (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach α series (variation patterns PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may have a lower jackpot expectation.

The RAM 102 in this feature section 079SG includes a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 079SG153, a game control counter setting section 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 079SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage section 079SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 079SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 is an area for holding various data used to control performance operations, such as data storage for performance control as shown in FIG. 10-11(A). Area 079SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 079SG191, a production control timer setting section 079SG192, a production control counter setting section 079SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 079SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 079SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 079SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 079SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 079SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 079SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (first starting opening winning prize designation command or the second starting opening winning prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (the Two commands (1 pending memory number notification command or 2nd pending memory number notification command) are sent as one set from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with these starting opening winning designation commands and pending memory number notification commands. , storage areas (entries) for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory are secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A when a starting winning is made to the first starting winning opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in Figure 10-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 10-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination process of the feature section 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be explained based on FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 079SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending memory number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 079SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol pending memories has reached the upper limit value at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 079SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 079SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 079SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 079SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 079SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, the effect control board 12 is stored in the pending memory. Settings for transmitting the number notification command are performed (step 079SGS113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and then the process of step 079SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the production control process processing in this feature section 079SG. In the production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 executes the prefetch notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and Hold display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotating display) the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation process (step 079SGS163) and the fourth symbol display process (step 079SG164) that executes the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 is executed depending on the value of the production control process flag. Execute the process.

FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special symbol pending memory in the reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of start winning is set to "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

Further, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A are stored for one buffer number each. Shift to the upper position (step 079SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is a third variable display result designation command or a fourth variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot B or probability variable jackpot C, a stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from among the chance numbers "334", "778", etc. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y) executes a chance-up performance determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to perform a chance-up performance in the second half of the first ready-to-win performance or the second half of the third ready-to-win performance.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-15, if the variable display result is a failure, it is decided to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%, and it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%. decide. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%. In other words, in the variable reach display of the feature section 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the jackpot expectation level is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, only one performance pattern is provided as a performance mode of chance-up performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as performance modes of the chance-up performance, and the expected degree of jackpot may be made to differ depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this feature section 079SG, there is only one timing to start the chance up performance as shown in FIGS. 10-27 and 10-32, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of performance start timings may be provided, and the expected degree of jackpot may be varied depending on from which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining whether to execute or not execute the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), the notification performance (big hit notification performance or miss A still image display effect for determining a performance pattern of a still image display effect that displays the still image displayed at the end of the second reach effect on the image display device 5 during a period until the start of the notification effect (notification effect). The determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-16(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100%. If pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a jackpot, the still image display performance pattern will be determined to pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

As shown in FIG. 10-16(B), the still image display effect pattern SG-1 freezes the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. The still image display effect pattern SG-2 is a performance pattern that is displayed as a still image after the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach performance. , is a production pattern that changes the color of the still image.

In particular, pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, so when the second reach effect is executed, the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the color of the still image changes.

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( Step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach β3 (step 079SGS281; Y ), executes an operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining a performance pattern of an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during execution of the fourth reach effect, and proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 10-17(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to pattern SS at a rate of 80%. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-2 at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17(B), the operation promotion performance pattern SS-1 is a performance pattern in which an image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is an effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a larger size than the pattern SS-1.

In other words, the operation promotion performance in the feature section 079SG is performed when an image of the large size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion performance is executed in pattern SS-2). (in the case where the image of the push button 31B of normal size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5) is higher than the case (in which case the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since the variable display result has a high probability of becoming a jackpot (a jackpot notification effect is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed. This allows players to increase their interest in gaming.

In step 079SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the above-mentioned chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) according to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the fluctuation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command; however, the performance control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer every time the variable display performance processing is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. Determine whether or not. If the process timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer after the subtraction has timed out, the process data At the same time as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the presentation device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

Next, the presentation mode of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in this feature section 079SG will be explained based on FIGS. 10-18 to 10-35.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in Figures 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (G), when the variable display starts, the image display In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, a moving image such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru. Hereinafter, the blinking or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in this feature section 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are all synchronously blinking or lighting. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

As shown in Figures 10-18, 10-19, and 10-26 (A) to 10-26 (C), when the timing of the development of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the first reach effect is reached. The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A is started. As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half execution period of the first reach performance begins, a video in which the friendly character A attacks the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of friendly character A towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is a variable display of super reach α1, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-18 and 10-26 (E) to 10-26 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, after a video of friendly character A's successful attack and enemy character A falling down is displayed as a jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and the jackpot game state is controlled. will be notified. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character A's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 10-26 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at the advancing speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-26(F)). Then, the video of the part where it is announced that the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and are controlled to the jackpot game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 10-26 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of Super Reach α2 or Super Reach α3, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the period shifts to the second half execution period of the first reach performance.

As shown in Figure 10-19 and Figures 10-27(A) to 10-27(B), when the second half of the first reach performance begins, the battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the first reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similar to the effect video of the battle effect.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which friendly character A attacks enemy character A in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F) In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, when the second half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-19 and 10-27 (E) to 10-27 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after ally character A's attack fails and is defeated by enemy character A, the decorative symbols stop at a failure combination and the variable display result is a failure. will be notified.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where the attack of ally character A fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that the failure is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguished display of the fourth symbol (display of the lights out of both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach α3, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-27 (D), during the second half execution period of the first reach effect, Character A's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated. Then, the process shifts to the first half execution period of the second ready-to-reach performance.

As shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (B), when the first half of the second reach effect is executed, ally character A and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half of the second reach performance comes to an end, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (C), an image is The display of concentrated lines starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, and at the same time, the display of the moving image of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character B starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

Additionally, during the period in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the effect production described above is gradually increased and displayed.

In other words, in the second half execution period of the second reach performance, as the progress speed of the battle performance video decreases to V2, the number of concentrated lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 blinks intensely. Therefore, by increasing the number of concentrated lines and blinking the game effect lamp 9, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the performance result of the battle performance (Which one is executed, the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance). It is possible.

After the execution period of the second half of the second reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28 (E), it is displayed at the end of the battle effect as a still image display effect. The image that was displayed (in this feature section 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F switches from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the rotation of the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3 without change, and the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is carried out without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 changes according to the progress of the video of the battle effect. The cycle returns to the previous cycle when the speed decreased to V2.

In addition, if pattern SG-2 is determined as the performance pattern for the still image display performance, as shown in Figures 10-29(A) to 10-29(E), the battle performance is used as the still image display performance. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the still image display performance in which the color is reversed ends, a jackpot notification performance will be provided to the effect that ally character A's attack hits enemy character B, and after enemy character B falls down, the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. be notified. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29 (F), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

As shown in Figure 10-20, the jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2 is that the video in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1. However, the moving image of the enemy character B falling down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, a moving image in which the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination after the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the progressing speed V1. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect will not be reversed and the image shown in FIG. 10-30 (A) will be displayed as the still image display effect. ) ~ As shown in Figure 10-30 (D), there is a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as shown in Figures 10-30 (F) ~ Figure 10-30 (H). There are times when a performance is performed.

The jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in Figure 10-20. In this example, a moving image in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at a advancing speed of V1, but a moving image in which enemy character B falls down is displayed at advancing speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B falls down, the progress speed is displayed at V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

In addition, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the failure notification effect is such that the attack of ally character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of enemy character B hits ally character A. After the ally character A falls down due to a hit, the decorative symbols stop at a wrong combination, and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

As the failure notification effect, as shown in FIG. 10-21, a moving image of ally character A's attack without hitting and being defeated by enemy character B is displayed at a progressing speed of V1. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (I), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguished display of the fourth symbol (display of the lights out of both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb) ) is carried out.

Next, regarding the variable display of super reach β1 to β3 shown in Figures 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31 (A) to 10-31 (H), when the variable display starts, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, a moving image such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

In addition, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru.

As shown in Figures 10-22, 10-23, and 10-31 (A) to 10-31 (C), when the timing of the development of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the third reach effect is reached. The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A is started. As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half execution period of the third reach performance begins, a video of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of ally character B toward enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is a variable display of super reach β1, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-22 and 10-31 (E) to 10-31 (G). Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, a moving image of friendly character B's successful attack and enemy character A falling down is displayed, and then it is announced that the jackpot game state will be controlled. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character B's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 10-30 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at the advancing speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 10-30(F)). Then, the video of the part where it is announced that the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination and are controlled to the jackpot game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 10-30 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2 or Super Reach β3, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-31 (D) , the attack of ally character B is not successful, and the execution period shifts to the second half of the third reach effect.

As shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-32 (A) to 10-32 (B), when the second half of the third reach performance begins, the battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the third reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 10-32 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1, similar to the effect video of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed with priority over the effect animation for the chance-up effect, while the effect animation for the chance-up effect is displayed with the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 10-32(B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display device 5. For this reason, in this feature section 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is in progress by visually recognizing the small symbols, and also display the effect video of the chance-up effect. By displaying the symbols with priority over the symbols, it is possible to reliably secure an area on the image display device 5 for displaying the effect animation of the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, the performance video of the chance-up performance is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design is displayed with priority over the performance video of the chance-up performance. may also be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize from which combination of decorative symbols the reach effect that is currently being executed has developed, thereby improving the game's interest.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video in which the friendly character B attacks the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period in which the attack of ally character B towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period when the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2, when the second half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after the attack of friendly character B fails and is defeated by enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a failure.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where ally character B's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach β3, as shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-32 (D), during the second half execution period of the third reach performance, Character B's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated. Then, the process moves to the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance.

As shown in Figures 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33 (A) to 10-33 (B), when moving to the execution period of the first half of the 4th reach effect, ally character AB and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the fourth reach performance first half execution period approaches, the image display device 5 changes as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33 (C). In the first display area 079SG005F, display of a moving image in which ally character B attacks enemy character B is started. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which friendly character B attacks enemy character B in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F) In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster).

In other words, in the second half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the progress speed of the video of the battle performance decreases to V2, and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw a player's attention to the performance result (Which of the jackpot notification performance and the loss notification performance is executed).

Then, as the second half of the fourth ready-to-reach performance progresses, the operation promotion performance is executed. When the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1, the push button 31B is displayed at the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 together with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates the shape of the push button 31B. The display of the meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period and the effect image 079SG005E is started, and the updated display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged updated display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the periphery of the image display device 5 are started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 10-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting operation of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by an updated display of the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. Update display progresses. In addition, since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player will be able to visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and when the operation promotion effect is not executed. The visibility of the battle performance is reduced. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 10-33 (D) and 10-33 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(A) to 10-34(E), when the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-2, the first display on the image display device 5 In the center of the area 079SG005F, a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B starts to be displayed as an operation promotion image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, together with an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb whose size is larger than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 10-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 10-34(D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting operation of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the updated display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb Most of the battle production images are hidden. Note that the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is an image having a larger size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and has a transmittance of 0%, as described above. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

Then, if the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or if the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is If the game ends), the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed from the timing when these players operate the push button 31B or from the timing when the operation promotion performance ends.

As the jackpot notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figures 10-24 and 10-35 (A) to 10-35 (C), a video of friendly character B's attack hitting enemy character B is shown. Although the animation is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image of the enemy character B falling is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the progressing speed V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (D), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

Also, as a failure notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figures 10-25 and 10-35 (E) to 10-35 (G), the attack of friendly character B hits enemy character B. First, on the contrary, after the enemy character B's attack hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is announced that the jackpot game state will not be controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-25, as the failure notification performance, a moving image is displayed at a progressing speed V1 until the attack of the ally character B does not hit and the decoration pattern stops with the combination of failures. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguished display of the fourth symbol (display of the lights out of both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb) ) is carried out.

In addition, Figure 10-26 (H), Figure 10-27 (H), Figure 10-29 (F), Figure 10-30 (E), Figure 10-30 (I), Figure 10-31 (H), As shown in FIG. 10-32 (H), FIG. 10-35 (D), and FIG. 10-35 (H), in this feature section 079SG, at the end timing of the variable display, the telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5. Although the present invention is not limited to this, at the end timing of the variable display, the display of the telop display area 079SG005T itself on the image display device 5 is illustrated. may be performed, but the display of the telop (message) itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be executed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a slow motion period other than immediately before the notification performance. Further, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened also during a part of the period (non-slow motion period) in which the display of the ready-to-win effect animation is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is During the first half execution period, the videos of each reach performance are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed of V1, and the second half of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is displayed. During the partial execution period, the moving images of each reach effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V2. For this reason, while the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, the degree of emotional empathy of the player towards the ally character displayed during the reach effect is increased, and jackpot notification is announced. Since it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the performance, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. On the other hand, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, BGM and performance sounds from speakers 8L and 8R are Since the output is still output at the normal playback speed of V4, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the sound output device in this feature section 079SG includes a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit 079SG134, and speakers 8L and 8R, so it is possible to reproduce the variable display including when performing a reach effect or when playing a jackpot game. Performance sounds such as high-quality BGM (songs) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R at appropriate volumes, making it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, the game effect Since the lamp 9 flashes at a shorter period than usual, the performance effect can be improved by flashing the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter period during the period when the progress speed of the performance video is V2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a form is exemplified in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing period of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win performance or the fourth ready-to-win performance. By doing so, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed soon by the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing from the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-19 to 10-25, during the execution period of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect, the progress of the effect video of the reach effect. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, the rotational speed of the hold display and the moving speed of the caption are both constant at V3, and the playback speed of the performance sound output from speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the rotation speed of the hold display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the moving display speed of the caption are both V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. The rotational speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, so each reach effect During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 to 10-25, during periods other than during the reach effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at rotation speed V3 in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. This is executed, and in the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3. In other words, the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop are executed at the same speed as during the reach effect, so that the player can It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2(C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time the telop display area 079SG005T ends. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from the left to the right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T. There may be a timing when a part of the displayed telop becomes invisible to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, and 10-28, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the display of the effect animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, and the image By executing the effect presentation of displaying concentrated lines on the display device 5, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect during the latter half execution period of the second ready-to-reach presentation, thereby improving the interest in the game. In particular, in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(C) and 10-28(D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle performance progresses, so the display of concentrated lines increases. By increasing the number, the player can more easily recognize that the second ready-to-win performance is finished and the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the effect production according to the present invention is exemplified as a display of concentrated lines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle performance) progresses, the effect level of the effect performance is increased one after another (for example, increasing the range of motion of the movable body 32, increasing the volume of a specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, The vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be vibrated, etc.).

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (G), and Figure 10-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect. When the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the jackpot notification performance is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the jackpot notification performance in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further increased, and the player is made aware that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It's easy to do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when executing the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. In a state where the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the first In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed overlappingly with the first pending storage display area 079SG005D, the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T).

At this time, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made transparent or displayed in a reduced size, or the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U are displayed in a reduced size. The visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the pending displays displayed in the pending display area.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F. As shown in FIG. 10-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotation display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and Since the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that a suspended display is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect, or that the telop is being displayed moving. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the pending display, and by stopping the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the caption, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the caption. .

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-16 and 10-29(A) to 10-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being performed by inverting the color of the still image.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as a still image display effect, a form of inverting the color of the still image was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Examples of ways to change the color of a still image include, but are not limited to, changing the color of a still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of a still image, and adding new colors to a still image. It may be added.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the colors of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can see what is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the hold display, telop, fourth symbol, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature part 079SG, there is a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed and then the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect is executed, and a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed. There is a pattern in which the variable display ends after the execution of the performance, transitioning to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, so the display of the reach performance video progresses during the first reach performance or third reach performance. Whether or not to move to the second reach performance or fourth reach performance after being executed at speed V2, and display of the performance video of the reach performance during the second reach performance or third reach performance are executed at progress speed V2 Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the player is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled after the game is played, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-23, 10-24, and 10-25, during the first reach performance and the third reach performance, the The production in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance and the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance are performed at the same time. Since it is executed at speed V1, the progress speed when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance or from the first half execution period of the third reach performance to the second half execution period of the third reach performance is different from the progress speed of the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, thereby excessively increasing the expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. You can prevent this from happening. Furthermore, Figure 10-18, Figure 10-20, Figure 10-22, Figure 10-24, Figure 10-25 and Figure 10-26 (E) to Figure 10-26 (G), Figure 10-29 (C) ~ Figure 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) ~ Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) ~ Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 10-35(C), in the jackpot notification performance of this feature section 079SG, while displaying a video when an enemy character collapses due to a hit by an attack of an ally character is executed at a progress speed of V2, Figure 10-19, Figure 10-21, Figure 10-23, Figure 10-25, Figure 10-27 (E) to Figure 10-27 (G), Figure 10-30 (F) to Figure 10-30 (H ), as shown in Figures 10-32 (E) to 10-32 (G), and Figures 10-35 (D) to 10-35 (F), in the failure notification effect, a video is displayed when an ally character falls down. is displayed at the progress speed V1, so when the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect video of the loss notification effect is not executed at the progress speed V2, which may cause player dissatisfaction. It can also be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the variable display result of super reach is a failure notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the failure notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the variable display of the super reach, the presentation animation of the loss notification presentation may be displayed at a progress speed V2 that is slower than V1. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the performance of the failure notification performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the progress speed V1 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the third speed in the present invention, and the progression speed V2 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-24 and 10-25, the operation promotion effect is executed when the video of the reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V2 during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Therefore, the performance effect of the fourth reach performance can be enhanced by the operation promotion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the display of the effect video of the fourth reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 while the operation promotion effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promotion performance, the display of the performance video of the fourth ready-to-reach performance may be performed at the progress speed V1. Furthermore, it is possible to execute a suggestion performance that suggests that the operation promotion performance will be executed before the operation promotion performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestion performance, the performance video of the fourth reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be executed.

In addition, as an operation promotion effect of the feature section 079SG, in addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M that notifies the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is now displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. While these operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb and meter 079SG005M are displayed, the display of the performance video of the 4th reach performance at the progression speed V2 is continued, but the display does not progress to the notification performance. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. With this, the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends (until the operation promotion effect ends), so if the push button is not operated by the player, the notification effect is It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, although the embodiment in which the detection means in the present invention is the push button 31B is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means may be other than the push button 31B, such as the stick controller 31A. In addition to the operation means described above, sensors capable of detecting the player's actions, such as a motion sensor or a touch sensor, may be used.

Also, Figures 10-18, 10-20, 10-22, 10-24, 10-26(E) to 10-26(G), 10-29(C) to 10-29 (E), Figure 10-30 (B) to Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E) to Figure 10-31 (G), Figure 10-35 (A) to Figure 10-35 (C ), in the jackpot notification performance in feature section 079SG, the video of the part where the attack of the friendly character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character falls down is displayed at the progress speed of V1. Displayed at speed V2. In contrast, Figures 10-19, 10-21, 10-23, 10-25, 10-27(E) to 10-27(G), 10-30(E) to 10- 30(G), FIG. 10-32(E) to FIG. 10-32(G), and FIG. 10-35(D) to FIG. The moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, and is never displayed at the advancing speed V2. In other words, when a jackpot notification performance is executed, a part of the performance video of the jackpot notification performance is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby giving the player the impression that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. can.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot in the present invention, a still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (a still image display effect in which colors are reversed). Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted as a still image display effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is used as a special effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is , effects other than the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow color, etc.) may be possible.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of this feature part 079SG is pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a pattern SS-1 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. This can be executed in any of the performance patterns including pattern SS-2 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, is displayed as the operation promotion image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be viewed through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, so the operation promotion effect is more difficult than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. The visibility of the battle performance of 4 reach performance is low. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-17, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot is the same as when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the variable display result is lower than the rate of hitting a jackpot, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2 is used to perform the operation promotion performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-24, 10-25, and 10-33 (C) to 10-33 (E), when displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba as an operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image While displaying 079SG005Ba, the display of the animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb changes the progress speed V2 (slow motion ), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is pattern SS. -2, in addition to displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the production video (battle (direction) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period in which the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation promotion performance pattern SS-2, the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this feature section 079SG, as super reach effects, a second reach effect can be executed after the first reach effect, and a fourth reach effect can be executed after the third reach effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, there is a variable display of super reach α1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the first reach effect, and a variable display of super reach β1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the third reach effect. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the second half execution period of the first reach performance after the first half execution period of the first reach performance and informs of the failure, and the second half of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance Variable display of super reach β2 that executes a partial execution period and informs of failure, variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the second reach effect after the first reach effect exchange partial execution period, third reach effect exchange partial execution period It is possible to perform a variable display of Super Reach α3 that transitions to the 4th Reach performance after , and as shown in Figures 10-18 to 10-25, from the execution period of the first half of the 1st Reach performance to the latter half of the 1st Reach performance. When transitioning to the execution period, When transitioning from the first half of the first reach performance to the first half of the second reach performance, When transitioning from the first half of the third reach performance to the second half of the third reach performance , when transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period. When transitioning to the execution period of the second half of the reach performance, when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance to the execution period of the first half of the second reach performance, from the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance When transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods. Therefore, when transitioning from the first half part execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance, when transitioning from the second half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period of the second reach performance, the third reach performance When transitioning from the execution period of the first half of the performance to the second half of the third reach performance, and when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the fourth reach performance, the player is given a sense of discomfort. You can prevent it from getting stowed away. Furthermore, by displaying the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branching of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach of this characteristic part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of super reach, three or more It may be possible to perform a reach effect, or it may be possible to perform only one reach effect.

Although the characteristic portion 079SG of the present invention has been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature section 079SG, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are provided as reach effects for super reach, and in all of these reach effects, a part of the effect video of the reach effect is provided. Although a mode in which the display is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A pattern in which the effect video is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Furthermore, the content of the effect may be different between a ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 and a ready-to-reach effect in which the display of the effect video is not performed at the progress speed V2. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the reach performance of the super reach, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether or not the presentation video is being displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the output format is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example 079SG-1, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are shown. In the first half of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance, the playback speed V4 is set from speakers 8L and 8R as in the first half execution period of each reach performance of 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance. While the production sound is output in V4, in the second half (slow motion period) of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, The effect sound may be output at a different playback speed (for example, playback speed V5 slower than V4). By doing this, the performance effect of the performance sound for the reach performance can be improved by varying the playback speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance video for the reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the performance effect of the performance sound for the reach performance can be improved. You can improve your interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the reach effect by displaying the effect image 079SG005E, displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, etc. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, after the end of the reach effect, , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-36(A) to 10-36(D), when the second reach effect is being executed, when the second reach effect is finished together with the still image display effect, As part of the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), the results are shown in FIGS. 10-36(E) and 10-36(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as a jackpot notification performance, or that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as a loss notification performance.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-37(A) to 10-37(D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player presses the push button 31B. When the operation promotion effect ends without operating the button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the second display. The image is enlarged and displayed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), the results are shown in FIGS. 10-37(E) and 10-37(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as a jackpot notification performance, or that it will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as a loss notification performance.

Note that the effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. 10-3(B), and the drawing range is expanded as an image based on the image data 2. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F without reducing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

In this way, in this modified example 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, After the end of the reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, so by changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the timing of the notification effect, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb changes. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, telop display, variable display of the fourth symbol, etc.

Furthermore, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image that is drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. The visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by being enlarged toward the display area 079SG005Sb. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be accurately reduced, and the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

Furthermore, although this modified example 079SG-2 exemplifies a form in which the operation promotion performance is executed during the fourth reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is part of the notification performance. It may be executed as a part.

In addition, when performing the operation promotion effect as part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-38(A) to 10-38(F) as a modification 079SG-3, the same as modification 079SG-2 is performed. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 10-38(D). do.

Note that by displaying these operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG.

Thereafter, the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the player operating the push button 31B, or the operation promotion performance is completed without the player operating the push button 31B, or the jackpot gaming state It is reported that the system is not controlled.

As described above, in this modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced due to the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data Since the visibility of the push button 31B does not decrease, the operation promotion effect can be made more prominent than the fourth ready-to-reach effect, and the player can be effectively urged to operate the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the variable display result is always a jackpot, but the present invention The invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example No. 079SG-4, if the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always It may be possible to have a variable probability jackpot (or even a variable probability jackpot A that is most advantageous to the player). Furthermore, as a performance pattern when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state again after the loss notification performance is executed once. It may also be possible to perform a revival effect that notifies the user of the situation. In addition, in the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, there are cases where the jackpot type is a definite variable jackpot and cases where it is a non-probable variable jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). There may be a case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and a case where it is controlled to a jackpot game state of variable jackpot. By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect will be executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. .

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, a message indicating the gaming status is displayed as an example of the telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this. The displayed captions may include a message indicating whether or not the variable display that is being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to a jackpot game state, the title of the reach effect that is currently being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, a mode is exemplified in which a telop can be displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T according to the state of the performance being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T The telops displayed are those that can identify the gaming status, the expectation level that the variable display result will be a jackpot in the variable display being executed (jackpot expectation level), the explanation of the performance being executed (especially the reach performance), and the reach performance. It may also be a preview performance that can be executed from a timing earlier than the above.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, during the period when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promotion effect (operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion The display of image 079SG005Bb) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is executed after the moving image of the reach effect returns from the progress speed V2 to the progress speed V1. Good too.

Furthermore, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34, an example is given in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed on the image display device 5 as the operation promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect includes not only simply displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, but also displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As a pre-display effect, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of each push button 31B are displayed overlappingly, thereby creating an operation promotion image. An effect may be performed in which 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed.

In addition, when performing the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5 as a precursor effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5. The moving display speed may be made to decrease as it approaches the center of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation promotion effect will be executed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (emission colors) of the game effect lamp 9 is different from when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. You can. For example, when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in multiple colors, while the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. When playing, the game effect lamp 9 may be able to emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the game interest from decreasing due to the emitted light color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21, 10-24, and 10-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the display of the moving image of the reach effect and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-26, 10-29, 10-30, 10-31, and 10-35, the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance is the end of the reach performance. Later, an example is shown in which the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in combinations that indicate a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns are displayed while swinging in combinations that indicate a jackpot. The timing may be during the reach performance.

Furthermore, the present invention provides a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of the effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. May be applied to By doing this, if the player has set the output of the effect sound that matches his/her preference, when the video of each reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V1, the speaker 8L , the effect sound output from 8R remains unchanged and is played back at the playback speed V4, so even though the player himself has selected the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the effect sound is played back at the playback speed V4. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to slow playback.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as an end suggestion performance in the present invention, it is possible to execute a performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, and the performance Although we have exemplified a form in which the variable display result always fails when executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. After the effect in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the reach effect, and then the variable display result shows that the jackpot is achieved. (For example, a case where a revival effect is performed) may be provided.

In addition, when performing the resurrection effect in this way, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and blinked before the animation of the resurrection effect is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is displayed to the player. It may be made to recognize that it will be executed. Further, as a presentation mode of the resurrection presentation, for example, the ally character may attack the enemy character again and defeat the enemy character. In particular, when performing a resurrection effect, a part of the video of the resurrection effect (for example, a video of a scene where an enemy character collapses) is displayed at a progress speed of V2 to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. Good too.

Further, although a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the gaming machine of the present invention can be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of characteristic parts and modifications. You may.

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature section 079SG may be a pachinko game machine that can change the jackpot probability by changing setting values as shown in FIGS. 1 to 9. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are out of order, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous to the player. is set, even if the variable display results are off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in pachinko game machine 1. good. By doing this, the fact that the variable display result is off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 can be used as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, in the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach β1, it is possible to suppress the decrease in player's interest due to the variable display result being wrong, and to draw the attention of the players to the fact that the variable display result is wrong. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that plays a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that plays at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. A gaming machine 1), which includes a sound output means (for example, the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice synthesis IC079SG132, audio data ROM079SG133, and amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the audio control board 13) capable of outputting the effect sound, and the effect sound. a display means capable of displaying a moving image (for example, an image display device 5); and a predetermined device for displaying a character's effect moving image on the display means and outputting a effect sound by the sound output means in conjunction with the display of the character's effect moving image. A performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance (for example, a reach performance) and a group performance (for example, a group preview performance) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIGS. 94 to 100), and the performance execution means executes the performance during the first period of the predetermined performance. A presentation video whose progress speed is a first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, a first reach presentation, a second reach presentation, and a third reach presentation) can be displayed on the display means. , the part where the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the execution period of the first half of each of the fourth reach effects), the first part of the predetermined effect after the first period) During the second period, it is possible to display on the display means an effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is at a second speed slower than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 to 10-25, During the execution period of the second half of each of the 1st reach performance, the 2nd reach performance, the 3rd reach performance, and the 4th reach performance, the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed of V2), Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, in FIG. 19 to FIG. 10-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance, the speakers 8L and 8R (The part where BGM and sound effects are output at the normal playback speed of V4), the image display period in the group effect is a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period. (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59), in the first display period, after the first character is displayed in the group effect, a new character is displayed, and any character is displayed first. (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)), the second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and the second display period is a period until the end of the new character. The third display period is a period during which the display of the displayed character continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 (a36)). This is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42)), and the first display During the period, from a first situation in which a part of the character displayed first is displayed, a part of the character displayed first is displayed more than in the first situation, and a character is displayed second. An example is a gaming machine in which a part of the game is displayed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 57 and 94).

According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to more suitably perform group effects.

In other words, by not changing the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined performance, it is possible to create a gaming machine that is less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and in addition, in the first display period, the From a first situation in which a part of the character is displayed, to a second situation in which a part of the character that was first displayed is displayed more than in the first situation, and a part of the character that was displayed second is displayed. After that, during the second display period, which is longer than the first display period, a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end, so only a single character is displayed. By eliminating this situation, it is possible to reliably inform the players that it is a group performance, and the start and continuation of the group performance can be suitably executed to improve the interest of the group performance. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to give players a sense of discomfort when installed in a gaming parlor, and that is more likely to attract players' interest.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that is less likely to give players a sense of discomfort in the presentation and can more appropriately execute the group presentation, when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the game A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a group effect (e.g., A group effect execution means (for example, a group effect execution process shown in FIG. 47, a six-person group effect shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) is provided, and the image display period in the group effect is a first The first display period includes a display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59), and the first display period starts displaying the first character in the group presentation, and then starts displaying the first character. The second display period is a period from when a new display of the character is displayed until the display of any character ends for the first time (for example, the period shown in FIG. 94 (a23) to FIG. 96 (a30)), and the second display period is This is a period that is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, FIG. 97 (a31) to FIG. 98 ( a36)), the third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a37) ~ period shown in FIG. 100 (a42)), in the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, the part of the first displayed character changes to An example of this is a gaming machine in which the second situation is displayed more than the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 57 and 94). Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

[Configuration of pachinko machine, etc.]
11 and 12 are front views of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIGS. 11 and 12 show an arrangement layout of main components in a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine. A pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a game is played by variably displaying special symbols. "Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

It should be noted that two types of special symbols are provided as the special symbols that are variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also referred to as a "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also referred to as a "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electro luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative symbols are displayed variably (for example, vertically scrolling display or (updated display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumu-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Yumu-chan is the main character that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1. Further, on the game board 2 at the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan that appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since Yumu-chan is the main character, she has the highest degree of importance among all the characters, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters, including Jam-chan. Furthermore, Jam-chan has the highest degree of importance among the characters other than Yumu-chan, who is the main character, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters other than Yumu-chan. Also, characters with higher priority than other characters, such as Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, are the characters that appear first, the characters that are placed in the most prominent position, or the characters that are placed in the most prominent position in the character selection scene, or the characters that are placed in the most prominent position in the character selection scene, or the characters that are placed in the most prominent positions It may be the highest ranked character among them.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 18). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the ball enters the second starting winning hole. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 11, three locations on the lower left of the gaming area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), the game board 2 is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiver member. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 18), and a big winning hole (as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state) by the big winning hole door. (hereinafter referred to as a large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1, and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 13) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A big winning opening door is provided in the space between, and by sliding open and closing horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, the regular big winning opening with game balls is opened. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 18), game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters a normal big prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters, for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 18), and a big winning hole (hereinafter referred to as a V big winning hole) that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. (referred to as the winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the V big prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the V large winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 24 (see FIG. 18) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing sound effects and the like.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 11) that operates according to the performance. The movable body 32 is configured such that the member labeled with the letters "POWERFUL" is located on the front side of the member labeled with the letter "2". As a result, the characters "POWERFUL2" are formed. "POWERFUL2" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be a name representing content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime, the name of a singer, etc.). In addition, the characters attached to the movable body 32 are the names of the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the character with the next highest priority after the main character (for example, "Yumemu-chan", the main character). ``Dreams'') may also be shown. In this embodiment, the model name (Powerful 2) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11 and a position covering the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. . Specifically, of the movable body 32, among the members labeled with the characters "POWERFUL" and the members labeled with the characters "2", only the members labeled with the characters "POWERFUL" are shown in FIG. By falling from the position shown in FIG. 112, it stops at a position covering the front surface of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. Note that the movable body 32 is also referred to as an accessory.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed (or pressed) by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 18).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 18).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's actions (operations, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a special map LED board 9020 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special figure LED board 9020 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the special pattern LED board 9020, the type of special pattern (first special pattern) in the first special pattern game and the special pattern in the second special pattern game are determined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs. (2nd special figure) represents the type. For example, as shown in FIG. 15(a), which will be described later, in the special figure LED board 9020, by combining lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display section 9022.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, number of reserved memories, right hit display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are determined by combinations of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs. (2nd special figure) represents the type. For example, as shown in FIG. 15(b), which will be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, by combining lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9053, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display section 9054.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a board top lamp provided above the game board 2. The lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the V grand prize opening are opened and the V winning is made. A V lamp 9G that notifies you that you are in a round of a possible jackpot game state or that a V winning has occurred, an electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, and an electric chew lamp 9H provided on the stick controller 31A. the stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, the frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the frame right lamp provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. and a lamp 9R. The V lamp may notify that a jackpot has occurred.

The accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member included in the movable body 32 and labeled with the word "POWERFUL" is divided into four parts, and the accessory lamp 9A1 is on the back side of the "P" and "O" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A2 is on the back side of the "P" and "O" parts. The accessory lamp 9A3 is placed on the back side of the "W" and "E" parts, the accessory lamp 9A3 is placed on the back side of the "R" and "F" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A4 is placed on the back side of the "U" and "L" parts. There is. As a result, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (emit light) on the back side of the member labeled with the word "POWERFUL", so that "POWERFUL" lights up (emits light).

The board left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, the main character (for example, "Yumemu" indicating the main character Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 depict the main character. are placed on the back side of the portion of the game board 2 where is drawn. As a result, the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where the main character is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 where the main character is drawn starts to light up (light up). ing.

As shown in FIG. 12, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13. On the upper side of the game board 2, on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and on-board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, divided into three areas: left, middle, and right. has been done. The parts of the game board 2 where the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the on-board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are provided are made of a transparent material that can transmit light. When 9C1 to 9C13 light up (light up) on the back side of the upper part of the game board 2, the upper part of the game board 2 lights up (lights up) in white or red.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn. As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when turned on (lights up), it lights up (lights out) the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (emits light), the stick controller 31A lights up (emits light). The trigger button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when turned on (emits light), the push button 31B is turned on (emits light).

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 14) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (emits light), the gaming machine The left side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 14) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (emits light), the gaming machine The right side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). Note that the left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. In addition, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric chew lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, trigger button lamp 9K, frame left lamp 9L, The frame right lamp 9R is also collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 13 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 18).

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 18) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) to the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps including left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L illuminates the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps including left frame lamps 9R2 to 9L12 running clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R illuminates the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the special pattern LED board 9020 and the fourth pattern unit 9050. As shown in FIG. 15(a), the special figure LED board 9020 includes a special figure 1 variable display part 9021 that shows a variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows a variable display of the second special figure. 9022, a special figure 1 memory display section 9023 indicating the first pending memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section 9024 indicating the second pending memory number corresponding to the second special figure game. , a normal pattern memory display section 9025 that shows the number of stored normal symbols, a normal pattern display section 9026 that shows a variable display of normal symbols, a right hitting display section 9030 that prompts the player to play right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. , a time saving display section 9029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 9027 indicating the number of jackpot rounds. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking using lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display section 9022 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 9020 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 9030. In this embodiment, when the player is encouraged to play right-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9030 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, That is, when urging the player to play left-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9030 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting designation command to the performance control CPU 120, and also lights up the right-handed display section 9030, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , sends a right-handed hit display light-off designation command to the performance control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed hit display section 9030. Note that if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right-hitting display section 9030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 9030.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into.

In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during this time, the right-handed display section 9030 urges the player to hit the right-handed ball. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), the fourth symbol unit 9050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, and 2 special figure 2 memory display section 9052 indicating the number of reserved memories, special figure 1 variable display section 9053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. This game includes a special figure 2 variable display section 9054 that shows , and a right-handed display section 9055 that prompts the player to play right-handed. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc. by lighting/flashing/turning off the lights using lighting means such as LEDs.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 9053 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display section 9054 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being variably displayed, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

In the following, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol indicates that the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is represented by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 and the special symbol 1 variable display section 9053. Also called. In addition, it is also referred to as the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display) that the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol is represented by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 9054. to be called.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights up (lights up), prompting the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 9055 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the performance control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display section 9055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and displays the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After the determination is made, the right-handed player display unit 9055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed player display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 9055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 9055 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 16 is a diagram looking into the space between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 11, the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be seen. .

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays images such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (designs indicating numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a first pending memory display area 5D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A displayable second pending storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 5J is displayed which indicates that the special symbol is being variably displayed and indicates the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories. At the left end of the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern 5M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed. The small designs are the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. The patterns corresponding to each of the decorative patterns are arranged vertically. Moreover, the small pattern 5M is a pattern that is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 17, a decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is smaller in size than the decorative pattern at the left end of the screen of the image display device 5. It is located. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), the screen of the image display device 5 has a rectangular or substantially rectangular shape, but as described above, the game board 2 has a cover on the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. It is fixed in a way that it covers it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part of the screen (particularly the edge) of the image display device 5 is not visible or is difficult to see due to the gaming board 2. It has become.

[Substrate configuration]
FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 18, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.), and the like. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later), and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 9020, etc., solenoid drive signals). It consists of:

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals ( A detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions on At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishment (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 9050 is connected to the production control board 12, and can light up (blink) each display section under the control of the control CPU 120.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game progresses as follows. When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started by the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 9020.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game is started by the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol, described later). The actual pattern differs depending on the type of jackpot.) When a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the above is achieved, a "jackpot" is achieved. In addition, in the combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 and the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020, the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is also referred to as a "specific display result." In addition, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 9021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 9022 of the special pattern LED board 9020 is a predetermined special pattern (small winning pattern) that is different from the jackpot pattern. ), a "small win" occurs when a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the above is achieved. In addition, the combination of lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 9021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 9022 of the special pattern LED board 9020 may be different from the jackpot pattern or the small winning pattern (loss pattern). When the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the symbols) is achieved, it becomes a "lose". In addition, in the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 9021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 9022 of the special pattern LED board 9020, a special pattern (losing pattern) that is different from the jackpot pattern or the small winning pattern The lighting mode corresponding to the symbol (symbol) is also referred to as a "loss display result".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state. Note that it is not necessary to provide a small win as the win type.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by either the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). It will continue until the earliest possible time. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 or 7 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, a jackpot type is set for "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning game state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, the game may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be performed to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. Note that the presentation is performed by displaying various presentation images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, etc. The effect may be performed by turning off the lights, moving the movable body 32, or using any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern game. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach, super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach, and strongest reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than super reach. Moreover, even within super reach, it is divided into the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived during the normal reach. Furthermore, the jackpot reliability is higher if the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than if the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Moreover, the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived at the strongest reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived at the latter half of the super reach. Note that, hereinafter, the "super reach" is also referred to as "SP reach," the "first half of super reach" is also referred to as "SP first half," and the "second half of super reach" is also referred to as "SP second half."

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a "jackpot" (the above-mentioned specific display result), a predetermined display result is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of decorative symbols. A determined decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) will be stopped and displayed, and the state will be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a "small win", a predetermined small win combination is displayed as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5. A fixed decorative pattern (for example, "1 3 5", etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, there are times when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot types in a jackpot gaming state similar to the small winning gaming state) and when it becomes a "small winning". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "losing" (the above-mentioned losing display result), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will not be the reach mode, but the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be changed. As a display result, a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also referred to as a "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns may become a "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). Further, as other performances, for example, a preview performance that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed variably. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, during the small winning game state, and in some jackpot types (a jackpot type in a jackpot gaming state in the same manner as the small winning gaming state, for example, a jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high certainty state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Various tables regarding jackpots]
Various tables related to jackpots will be explained with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20.

(Win type)
FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining the winning types. As shown in FIG. 19, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of openings in the jackpot ( number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and variable probability jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. Note that, hereinafter, each round may be denoted by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1R, and the second round is also called the 2R.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the three rounds of jackpot game states. In the probability variable jackpot 1, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 6, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 7th round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 7, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In probability variable jackpots 8 and 9, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

(each random number)
FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 20, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot. Random 1, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 until it reaches its upper limit of 65536, and then is updated from 1 again. Random 2 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining a post-variation pattern) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to a post-variation among the variation patterns. The later variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the special symbol. Note that Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a loss.For example, it is updated by 1, and then added and updated from 1 to its upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to the winning time, and for example, is incremented and updated from 1 to 239, which is the upper limit, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the previous variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the previous variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns. The front fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Random 5, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 until it reaches the upper limit of 251, and then is updated again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 6, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 to the upper limit of 201, and then is updated again from 1.

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) whether or not the control is to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state which is an advantageous state for the player. Then, out of the plurality of types of jackpots, which jackpot is to be determined is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

In addition, first, the post-variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random numbers for determining the post-variation pattern (Random 3, 4), and the pre-variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the pre-variation pattern (Random 5). be done. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 21(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal time jackpot determination table, jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 21(a), and in the probability change jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are set in the lower column of FIG. 21(a). Jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in . The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table when the probability is variable is the same as the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table during normal times, by adding the jackpot judgment value unique to the jackpot judgment value when the probability is variable. A larger number of jackpot judgment values than the jackpot judgment table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, a jackpot is determined with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number for jackpot determination (Random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variable jackpot). Note that FIG. 21(a) shows the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot or the probability (proportion) of losing.

FIGS. 21(b) and 21(c) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 21(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 21(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 21(b) contains numerical values that are compared with the random 2 value for jackpot type determination, and correspond to normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 4. Judgment values are set for the number of judgment values that have been set. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(b), for the first special drawing, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the normal jackpot 2 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s. 25 random 2 values out of 1 are assigned, probability variable jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 2 is assigned 37 out of 100 random 2 values. random 2 values are assigned, probability variable jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s. is assigned a value of

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 21(c), judgment values are set as many as the number of judgment values corresponding to each of probability variable jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 2. has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(c), for the second special figure, the probability variable jackpot 5 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the probability variable jackpot 6 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s. 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's are assigned, probability variable jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's, and probability variable jackpot 8 is assigned 70 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's. 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned to probability variable jackpot 9.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 2 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

[Production control command]
FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining an example of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main side control board, transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 22 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a previous variation (previous variation pattern) among variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous fluctuation pattern). The front variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation in the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command corresponding to each of the previous variation patterns specified by the number.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the performance control CPU 101 receives the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 84XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a later variation (later variation pattern) among the variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The after variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns, there is a post-fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each post-fluctuation pattern specified by the number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variable jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variable jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variable jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variable jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variable jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variable jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variable jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variable jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variable jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 9 has been determined. Each of the loss specification command, the normal jackpot 1 and 2 specification commands, and the probability variable jackpot 1 to 9 specification commands, or these collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 9 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 10 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 11 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start specification commands 1 to 11 or these collectively are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command indicating that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The grand prize opening designation command is also referred to as the A1 series command. A2XX(H) is a specified command after the opening of the grand prize opening indicating the closing of the grand prize opening of the number (round) indicated by XX. The command specified after opening the big prize opening is also referred to as the A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designation commands or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passing designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command B200 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is the production control command shown. Among these, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which the MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed player display light-off designation command indicating that the right-handed player display is turned off. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed hitting display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed hitting display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[Variation pattern]
The contents of the fluctuation pattern, determination of the fluctuation pattern, etc. will be explained with reference to FIGS. 23 to 29.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a previous variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the previous variation, and a subsequent variation pattern, which corresponds to the subsequent variation, and the combination has different contents. It is now included. Note that the previous variation pattern corresponds to the previous variation pattern command (80XX(H)) explained using FIG. 22, and the after variation pattern corresponds to the after variation pattern command (84XX(H)) explained using FIG. corresponds to

(Main side pre-fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of previous variation patterns each assigned a previous variation number, the previous variation number 1 is a previous variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern for 13 seconds). It is. The previous variation number 2 is a previous variation pattern command (8001(H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002(H)) that specifies a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

The pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003(H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory item x) (a reach in which the movable body 32 does not operate although it is in a reach mode). The pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004(H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory object ○) (a reach in which the movable body 32 operates in a reach mode). Pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into a final reach in a reach mode).

Pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies that a normal reach (accessory object x) is executed after one pseudo variation. Pseudo-variation means that after the variable display (variable display) of a decorative pattern starts until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted. This is a variable display (variable display). A performance that repeats such pseudo fluctuations is also called a pseudo-run. By executing the pseudo series, a variable display based on one suspended memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of pseudo variable displays. Note that a variable display that restarts after being temporarily stopped is also referred to as a "re-variable display." The pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007 (H)) that specifies that a normal reach (accessory object ◯) is to be executed after one pseudo variation. Pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo variation.

The pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (accessory object ×) is executed after performing the pseudo variation twice. Pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (accessory object ○) is to be executed after performing a pseudo variation twice. Pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo variation twice.

A variation time is specified for each of the previous variation patterns, and an animation (moving picture) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes approximately 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting a moving image. For example, in the case of patterns with previous variation numbers 7 to 9, 41500 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is approximately 1246. Furthermore, in the case of patterns with previous variation numbers 10 to 12, 62000 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is approximately 1861.

(Main side post-variation pattern)
FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns to which post-fluctuation numbers are assigned, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second variation. Post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. Post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. Post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403(H)) that designates execution of a pseudo continuous sequence. A pseudo-sequence is a performance that pretends to execute a pseudo-sequence but ends up not executing the pseudo-sequence.

Post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into an SP reach). Post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops into SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the second half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops in the second half of SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (a variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

Post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies normal reach (win) (variation of decorative symbols that becomes a reach mode and becomes a win mode). Post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of SP (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into SP reach and becomes a winning mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of SP (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops in the second half of SP reach and becomes a winning mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies the final reach (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into the final reach and becomes a winning mode at the final reach).

(Determination of post-change pattern)
The post-change pattern is determined using a different random counter depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a loss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a loss. As shown in FIG. 25, when the jackpot determination is determined to be a loss, a post-variation pattern is determined using Random 3 explained in FIG. 20. Furthermore, when it is determined that the jackpot is a loss, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values depending on the number of pending memories after the jackpot, and furthermore, the post-variation number to be determined is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(a), if the number of retained memories after digestion is 0, one of the post-change patterns from post-change numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, A different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-fluctuation patterns. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is one, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is two, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 2, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is three, one of the post-variation patterns is determined from post-variation numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-variation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption, and furthermore, the post-fluctuation number is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption. Therefore, the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining a post-change pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 26, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a post-variation pattern is determined using Random 4 explained in FIG. 20. Further, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a post-variation pattern is determined using different numbers of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26(a), if it is determined to be a normal jackpot 1 or 2, a definite variable jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8, then any one of the post variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined. Post-fluctuation patterns are determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When it is determined to be either a probability change jackpot 3 or 9, one of the after fluctuation patterns is determined from among the after fluctuation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the after fluctuation patterns. . Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When the probability variable jackpot is determined to be 4, one of the later variation patterns is determined from among the later variation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the later variation patterns. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, since the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, and this makes it possible to add variety to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figure 25, the probability of being determined to be one of the fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 after developing into SP reach or final reach is about 1/102 in the case of a loss, whereas in the case of a jackpot Since the time is higher than that, approximately 1/1.1, it is possible for the player to expect that a jackpot will occur if the SP reach or final reach develops.

(Judgment of previous fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the previous variation pattern determination table. The pre-fluctuation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of the pre-determined post-fluctuation pattern. Further, the pre-variation number to be determined also differs depending on the type of the post-variation pattern previously determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27(a), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 1 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(b), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 2 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(c), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 3 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(d), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 4 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 27(e), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation numbers 5 and 9 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation numbers 4 and 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(f), if any one of the post variation patterns with post variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined, the previous variation pattern with any of the pre variation numbers 4, 7, and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(g), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 7 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 27(h), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 11 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with any of pre-variation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(i), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 8 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of any of pre-variation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined. As shown in FIG. 27(j), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 12 is determined, the previous variation pattern with any of the previous variation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined.

(Total fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as explained in FIGS. 25 to 27, one of the variation patterns with main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 28 will be obtained.

FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the sub side. Furthermore, on the sub side, variation patterns of sub variation numbers 1 to 26 are determined to correspond to the variation patterns of main variation numbers 1 to 26, respectively.

[Each preview performance]
FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining the lottery table in each preview performance. In the present embodiment, a preview performance suggesting that the display result of the variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols will be a predetermined jackpot symbol may be executed. The preview performance is also a performance that suggests or foretells the occurrence of a jackpot, or a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot. The preview performance includes a group preview performance (also referred to as a group preview or group performance) and an SP first half title preview performance (also referred to as an SP first half title preview).

The group preview performance is a performance that displays an image in which a plurality of objects advance as a group. The plurality of objects include anything that moves, such as characters such as people, fish, and animals, and machines such as airplanes and cars. There may be one type of object such as a character, or there may be multiple types. A pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of types of group preview presentations. Specifically, there is a six-person group preview in which six characters dressed as maids advance as a group, a Bakchu group preview in which a rat character with the body of a bomb named Bakuchu advances in a group, A Boingo group preview in which characters named Boingo move together as a group may be executed.

In the present embodiment, the group preview performance is determined whether or not it is executed in the group preview lottery when the after fluctuation number 6 to 8 or 10 to 12 is determined to be the after fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach or final reach. and the type of group preview effect to be executed.

FIG. 30(a) shows a lottery table for executing a group preview lottery in stage A. In this embodiment, even if variable display is performed based on the same variation pattern, multiple types of stages are provided that have different production modes (background images, BGM, sound effects, appearing characters, etc.). . Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, stage A is a stage where a character named Yumu-chan, one of the six characters dressed as maids, performs.

As shown in FIG. 30(a), if the post-variation pattern corresponding to a loss is determined to be a post-variation pattern with post-variation numbers 6 to 8, a group preview effect will be executed with a probability of 15%, and among these, a probability of 6-8 will be executed with a probability of 13%. It will be decided to be a group of people's notice, and there is a 2% probability that it will be decided to be a group of Boingo's notice. In addition, if the after variation pattern corresponding to the winning number is determined to be 10 to 12, a group preview effect will be executed with an 85% probability, of which a 6 person group notice will be executed with a 55% probability, and a 30% It is decided that the Boingo group will be announced with a probability of .

Here, considering that the probability of losing is about 319/320, and the probability of being determined to the after variation pattern of after variation numbers 6 to 8 is about 1/102, when the probability of losing variation number 6 to 8 is about 1/102, The probability of being determined as a post-fluctuation pattern is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 15%, so the probability that the group notice will be executed in the event of a loss is about 0.15%. On the other hand, considering that the probability of hitting the jackpot is approximately 1/320, and the probability of being determined to the after fluctuation pattern of after fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 is approximately 1/1.1, it is assumed that the probability of hitting the jackpot is approximately 1/1.1. The probability of determining the post-fluctuation pattern is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group announcement will be executed is about 85%, so the probability that the group announcement will be executed at the time of winning is about 0.27%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of hitting the jackpot when the group notice is executed is approximately 64%. Note that the reliability (expectation level) of the group preview is not limited to 64%, but as long as it exceeds 50%, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot by executing it.

FIG. 30(b) shows a lottery table for executing the group preview lottery in stage B. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, stage B is a stage where a performance is performed by a character named Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 30(b), if the post-variation pattern corresponding to a loss is determined to be a post-variation pattern with post-variation numbers 6 to 8, a group preview effect will be executed with a 10% probability, and an explosion will occur with an 8% probability. It will be decided to be a Chu group notice, and with a 2% probability it will be decided to be a Boingo group notice. In addition, if the after variation pattern corresponding to the winning number is determined to be 10 to 12, there is a 90% probability that a group preview performance will be executed, and among these, there will be a 60% probability that it will be determined to be a Bakuchu group notice, and 30 % probability that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice.

Here, as mentioned above, the probability that the variation pattern after variation numbers 6 to 8 will be determined in the event of a loss is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 10%, so the probability that the group notice will be executed in the event of a loss is about 0.10%. On the other hand, at the time of winning, the probability of being determined to the variation pattern after variation numbers 10 to 12 is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group announcement will be executed is about 90%, so the probability that the group announcement will be executed at the time of winning is about 0.28%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of hitting the jackpot when the group notice is executed is about 74%. Note that the reliability (expectation level) of the group preview is not limited to 74%, but as long as it exceeds 50%, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot by executing it.

The SP first half title preview is an effect that suggests a jackpot based on the display mode of the character image indicating the first half of the SP reach title when the SP reach is developed. In this embodiment, the display of the character image of the SP first half title is executed in both stage A and stage B, but the preview effect that changes the display mode of the character image of the SP first half title is performed in stage B. Executed only on Note that even in the case of stage A, a preview effect that changes the display mode of the character image of the SP first half title may be executed.

In this embodiment, when the SP first half title preview is determined to be a post-variation pattern of post-variation numbers 6 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach, it is determined whether or not it is executed in the SP first half title preview lottery. , and the type of SP first half title preview to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 30(c), if the after fluctuation pattern is determined to be the after fluctuation number 6 to 8 corresponding to a loss, the SP first half title preview will be executed with a 20% probability, and the after fluctuation number corresponding to a win will be executed. If the variation pattern after 10 to 12 is determined, the SP first half title preview will be executed with a probability of 80%.

Here, as mentioned above, the probability that the variation pattern after variation numbers 6 to 8 will be determined in the event of a loss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed is about 20%, so the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed in the event of a loss is about 0.20%. On the other hand, at the time of winning, the probability of being determined to the variation pattern after variation numbers 10 to 12 is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed is approximately 80%, so the probability that the SP first half title preview will be executed at the time of winning is approximately 0.25%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of hitting the jackpot when the SP first half title preview is executed is approximately 56%. Note that the reliability (expectation level) of the SP first half title preview is not limited to 56%, but as long as it exceeds 50%, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot when it is executed.

In this way, the reliability (expectation level of jackpot) in the group preview is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B), while the reliability (in the case of jackpot) in the SP first half title preview is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B). Expectation level) was 56%, and group previews have higher reliability than SP first half title previews. Therefore, when the group preview is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the SP first half title preview is executed, and the player is more likely to see the group preview being executed than the SP first half title preview. We have come to expect that.

In addition, the Boingo group notice in Stage A is only executed with a 2% probability when there is a loss, but it is executed with a 30% probability when there is a win, so when the Boingo group notice is executed, , there is a high possibility that it will be a jackpot. On the other hand, the 6-person group notice in Stage A is executed with a probability of 13% when it is a loss, but is executed with a 55% probability when it is a win, so even if the 6-person group notice is executed, it will not be a loss. The possibility of this is greater than the Boingo group prediction. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed, and the player is more likely to experience the Boingo group notice than when the 6-person group notice is executed. We have come to expect that.

Similarly, the Boingo group notice in Stage B is executed with a probability of only 2% in the case of a loss, but is executed with a probability of 30% in the case of a win, so when the Boingo group notice is executed. is most likely a jackpot. On the other hand, the Bakuchu group preview in Stage B is executed with an 8% probability when it is a loss, but with a 60% probability when it is a win, so the Bakuchu group notice is executed. There is a greater possibility that this will be a failure than the Boingo group preview. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the Bakuchu group notice is executed, and the player feels that the Boingo group notice is executed more than the Bakuchu group notice. We have come to expect that.

Furthermore, the six-person group preview in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% when the game is a loss, but with a probability of 55% when the game is a win. On the other hand, the Bakuchu group preview in Stage B is executed with a probability of 8% when the game is a loss, but with a probability of 60% when it is a win. For this reason, the Bakuchu group preview in Stage B is executed more often at the time of a jackpot than the 6-person group preview in Stage A. As a result, when the Bakuchu group preview is executed in Stage B, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group preview is executed in Stage A, and the player is People have come to expect that crowd announcements will be carried out.

Note that the reliability of the group notice at stage A and the reliability of the group notice at stage B may be designed to be the same. In this case, both the group preview in Stage A and the group preview in Stage B need only be higher in reliability than the SP first half title preview, and the Boingo group preview is higher than the 6-person group preview and the Bakuchu group preview. It would be good if the reliability was high.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step S5) after executing the recovery process (step S4). The CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 through the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then executes the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, the firing of the game ball by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and losing symbols etc. are stopped and displayed, and a game stopping state different from the losing symbol is displayed. The display may be controlled so that a display corresponding to the display is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor or the like. The display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, and if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 and The setting change process in step S7 is executed and control becomes possible in the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed along with the recovery process in step S4 and control becomes possible in the setting confirmation state. . When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 is executed. Although it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt. (Step S10). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, the CPU 103 outputs, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1. Data such as information (information indicating the number of starting winnings, etc.), probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side using software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The game is executed by driving the game display unit 26, and the number of pending games is displayed by lighting the game memory display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying judgment results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 32 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes processing to make settings for varying the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and special symbol 2 variable display section 22, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stopping process involves stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22, and stopping and displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbol. Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "lose", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and decreasing the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning the jackpot. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (step S51). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the number of stored first special symbols has reached the upper limit value in step S52 (Y in step S52), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S54). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the number of second special pattern pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the second special pattern, is set to the predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing either of the processes of step S53 or step S56, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S57). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step S58). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 selects a random number 1 for jackpot determination and a random number 1 for jackpot determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section (not shown). Numerical data indicating random number random 2 and random number random 3 and 4 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage section corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers Random 1 to Random 4 is stored in the first special figure holding storage section (not shown), while when the starting opening buffer value is "2" At some point, numerical data indicating random numbers Random 1 to Random 4 is stored in a second special figure reservation storage section (not shown).

The numerical data indicating random number random 1 for jackpot determination and random number random 2 for jackpot type determination determines whether or not the fluctuating display result of special symbols and decorative symbols is considered a "jackpot". It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random numbers 3 and 4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used to determine the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step S59, transmission settings for a starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value are performed (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the effect control board 12 Settings are made to send the first start prize designation command to. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, 2. Configure settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 32 after the special symbol process process is completed. Ru.

Following the process of step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage (step S61). Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the starting opening buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the starting winning determination process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 35, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 stores the first reservation storage buffer (a storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reservation storage buffer (the storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the second special symbol). It is determined whether there is any pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information (step S1001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation was stopped (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (Y in step S1002), processing is performed to transmit a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S1003), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step S1004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Through the control in steps S1004 to S1006, if even one piece of data in the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data in the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step S1009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes processing to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 20) and a random number for jackpot determination, and if they match, it is determined to be a jackpot. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a variable-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance (the table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 21(a) are set), and a table in which the number of jackpot determination values is A normal jackpot judgment table (table in which the numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 21(a) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the jackpot judgment table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 21(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step S1011), the process moves to step S1012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state is performed based on whether or not a variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the gaming state is transferred to a variable probability state, and is reset when the variable probability state is ended. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times), and the next jackpot has been determined. It is reset at the timing when the earlier of the following conditions is satisfied, the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step S1011), the process advances to step S1015, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any jackpot determination value in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 21(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 21(c) are tables used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the determination tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 21(b). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 21(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and stores them in the pending storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for jackpot type determination are determined (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 36, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a post-fluctuation pattern based on random numbers 3 and 4, depending on the number of pending memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a loss, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the after fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 26 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the after fluctuation pattern based on the selected after fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of random 4. decide.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a previous variation pattern based on Random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the previous variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on a pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (previous variation pattern and subsequent variation pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol variation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1105). S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 37, in the special symbol fluctuation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1201), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to a value corresponding to the stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 38, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 22. Control is performed to derive and display (step S1301). In addition, if data indicating "1st" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 is ended, and "2nd" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data has been set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the production control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process moves to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Also, with reference to the opening pattern data stored in the ROМ101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the time between rounds for the normal big winning hole and the V big winning hole. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, opening modes for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 3R are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability-variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening a normal big prize opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening a V big winning opening in the 4th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in a RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a 10R variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the regular big prize opening in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. . Data on the number of openings (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (for example, the time when the occurrence of the jackpot is announced on the image display device 5) which is the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step S1309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process moves to step S1316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step S1311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process moves to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step S1313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability variation flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step S1315), and proceeds to step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process moves to step S1315 without performing the process in step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 39, in the jackpot release preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a big winning hole opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step S1404). As a result, in the 1st round, the normal big prize opening is opened.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). A corresponding grand prize opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 40, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process moves to step S1511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step S1503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

In step S1503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (Y in step S1504), the winning prize counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that control is to be performed in a variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process moves to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process moves to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1508), a probability variation determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process moves to step S1510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches a predetermined value (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to close the normal big winning opening by driving the solenoid 82, or controls to close the normal big winning opening by driving the solenoid 83 to close the V big winning opening. One of the controls for closing is performed (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs processing to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning prize counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the process.

(Post-processing after jackpot release)
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 41, in the jackpot release post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the release number counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), and a jackpot end time (indication that the jackpot game has ended) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, set a value corresponding to the time to be notified on the image display device 5 (step S1603), update the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), Finish the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a specified command after opening the big winning opening is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the V big prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V big prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying that the big prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot termination process. As shown in FIG. 42, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process moves to step S1705. In step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1704), a probability variation flag indicating that the probability variation state is present is set (step S1707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), a probability variation determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process moves to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1710), and a time saving number counter is set to 150 (step S1711). Then, the process moves to step S1712.

On the other hand, in step S1704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), in step S1705, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is in effect is set (step S1705), and a time saving number counter is set to 100. (step S1706), and the process moves to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained.

(Main processing for production control)
When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control main process. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the on-board CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register settings of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control process. The production control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 43. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 44, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. When receiving a production control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special game is a "lose", and the production process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in FIG. 45, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a loss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a loss, the production control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variation pattern has been received as a variation pattern command (step S7103).

When determining that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result of a loss that does not become a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol using the data table for determining a loss symbol (step S7105), the process advances to step S7106.

If it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (if it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbols of the production symbols constituting the combination of reach symbols are determined (step S7104), and in step S7106 Proceed to.

Further, if it is not determined to be a loss in the process of step S7101 (if it is determined to be a jackpot), the performance control CPU 101 configures a combination of jackpot symbols according to the type of jackpot. A stop symbol of the production symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing a performance setting process (step S7106) for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, a group preview setting process), the process advances to step S7107.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, symbol fluctuation control is performed according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command and various performance control (performance movement) patterns specified by the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the pattern table, one of the performance control patterns corresponding to the designated various performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, the performance symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of variation of the performance symbols until the final stop symbol, the final stop symbol, is stopped and displayed. Multiple types of data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as the variation display operation in the reach production, the production display operation due to the pseudo series production, and the production display operation in the preview production are stored in multiple types as symbol variation control patterns. has been done.

In addition, each symbol variation control pattern is used to control the variation display of production symbols, such as production control process timer setting values, production control process timer judgment values, production display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and end codes. It includes control data for controlling various performance operations according to the data, and the content of various performance controls, switching timing of performance control, etc. are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the production control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, a process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process in step S7109, the production device (the image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, Then, control of the speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is started (step S7110). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, a command is outputted to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a production pattern) according to the variation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting/extinguishing of light emitting bodies such as various LEDs, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), and the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

(Group notice setting process)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice setting processing. The group notice setting process is a process included in the variable display start setting process (step S171).

As shown in FIG. 46, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern command capable of executing a group preview has been received (step S7061). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 sends a variation pattern command including the after variation patterns of after variation numbers 6 to 8 when a loss occurs, and a variation pattern including after variation patterns of after variation numbers 10 to 12 when a win occurs. Determine whether a command has been received. In addition, the fluctuation patterns including the after fluctuation patterns of after fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 are the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 8 to 15, and the fluctuation patterns including the after fluctuation patterns of after fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 are the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 18 to 12. ~26 fluctuation patterns.

If the effect control CPU 120 has not received a variation pattern command that can execute a group preview (N in step S7061), the process ends. On the other hand, when the production control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command that can execute a group notice (Y in step S7061), it converts the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command into the number of frames (step S7062). For example, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 22, the previous variation time is 41500 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 1246, and the subsequent variation time is 91900 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 3000. For example, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26, the previous variation time is 62000 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 1861, and the subsequent variation time is 142800 msec, so the number of frames is approximately 4288. .

The performance control CPU 120 executes a group preview lottery (step S7063). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses the group preview lottery table shown in FIGS. Determine the type of.

The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a prize has been won in the group preview lottery. If the performance control CPU 120 does not win in the group preview lottery (N in step S7064), the process ends. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 wins the group preview lottery (Y in step S7064), it extracts a performance control pattern for executing the group preview according to the stage (step S7065), and ends the process.

For example, as shown in Example 1, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 22 and in the case of stage A, the production control is performed so that the group preview is executed from the 985th frame of the 1246 frames in the previous variation. A pattern is set. Further, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 22 and in the case of stage B, the effect control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 1385th frame among the 3000 frames in the post-variation.

For example, as shown in Example 2, in the case of a variation pattern with main variation number 26 and in stage A, production control is performed to execute a group preview from the 1600th frame out of 1861 frames in the previous variation. A pattern is set. Further, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26 and in the case of stage B, the effect control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 2000th frame out of 4288 frames in the post-variation.

In this way, in this embodiment, in the case of stage A, the group notice is executed in the pre-variation, whereas in the case of stage B, the group notice is executed in the post-variation. There is.

(Group notice execution processing)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of group notice execution processing. The group preview execution process is included in the variable display performance process (step S172).

As shown in FIG. 47, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the number of frames corresponding to the performance control pattern set in the variable display start setting process (step S7201). For example, when the performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of main variation number 26 is set, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the 6149th frame, which is the total number of frames.

If the performance control pattern for executing the group preview has not been set (N in step S7202), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, when the performance control pattern for executing a group preview is set (Y in step S7202), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the frame of the execution timing of the group preview has been reached (S7203). For example, in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26 and in the case of stage A, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 1600th frame has been reached.

If the execution timing frame of the group preview has not been reached (N in step S7203), the production control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, when the execution timing frame of the group preview has been reached (Y in step S7203), the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices to execute the group preview (step S7204). For example, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to turn on, blink, or turn off based on the group notice lighting table shown in FIGS. 62 to 68, which will be described later, and controls the speakers 8R and 8L to Performs control to output sound. After that, the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 21 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability-variable jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 9030 of the special pattern LED board 9020 and the right-handed hitting display section 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, 10 times in the case of a 10R variable jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V win occurs during a jackpot round, the gaming state is controlled to be variable in probability over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled to be in a time saving state.

Even in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 9030, and the right-hand game display section 9055 continue to perform the right-hand game promoting effect. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the second special figure game include probability-variable jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-hand hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-hand hitting display section 9030, and the right-hand hitting display section 9055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 9030, and the right-handed hitting display section 9055 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable-probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 9030, and right-handed hitting display section 9055 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area.

[Design of group preview performance]
Next, the design of the group preview effect at the development stage of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Group advance notice work process)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the group advance notice work process. As shown in FIG. 48, the work processes for group previews are, in the order of work, a summary creation process (step S901), an animation production process (step S902), a main video production process (step S903), and an authoring process. (Step S904), sound creation process (Step S905), lottery integration process (Step S906), video integration process (Step S907), sound integration process (Step S908), lamp data The process includes a creation process (step S909) and a lamp assembly process (step S910).

In the outline creation step of step S901, an outline for newly designing a group preview in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created.

In the animation production process of step S902, the animation storyboard used in the group preview is created, the characters and backgrounds used in the animation are designed, the V-board is created as a script for creating the animation, and the CG for the animation is created. production, and the actual production of animation.

In the main video production process of step S903, video data used in the group preview is created using the animation created in the animation production process. The video data used in the group preview is created in this video production process, but the playback time of the created video data is longer than the execution time of the group preview actually executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Created for a long time. As a result, even if the execution time of the group preview becomes longer due to a design change, the video data created in the video production process can be used as is without being changed. In addition, in this video production process, the playback timing is also designed for each video data so that the video data is played back at a predetermined timing for each performance. For example, in the variation pattern with main variation number 22, the group preview animation for stage A is included in the main video so that the group preview is executed from the 985th frame, and the group preview for stage B is executed from the 1385th frame. An animation of the group preview is included in this video so that the group preview is executed from the beginning. In addition, in the variation pattern with main variation number 26, the group preview animation for stage A is included in the video so that the group preview is executed from the 1600th frame, and the group preview for stage B is executed from the 2000th frame. An animation of the group preview is included in this video so that the group preview is executed from the beginning.

In the authoring step of step S904, software (program) for video playback to be executed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created using the video data created in the video production step.

In the sound creation process of step S905, data for various sounds such as BGM (background sound) and sound effects used in the group preview are created in accordance with the group preview video.

In the lottery incorporating step of step S906, data regarding various lotteries related to the group preview lottery, such as the group preview lottery, is created. In addition, in the process of incorporating this lottery, the expectation level (reliability) of the group notice etc. is designed. The created lottery data is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as lottery software to be executed in the pachinko game 1.

In the video embedding step of step S907, the video playback software created in the authoring step is installed into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as video playback software that is executed at the group notice.

In the sound incorporation step of step S908, the sound data created in the sound creation step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as software for sound reproduction executed at the group notice.

In the lamp data creation step of step S908, data on various lighting conditions such as lighting, blinking, and turning off of lighting means (light emitting means) such as lamps and LEDs used in the group notice is created.

In the lamp installation step of step S910, data such as lighting, blinking, and turning off of various lamps and LEDs created in the lamp data creation step is used as software for lamp reproduction executed in the pachinko game 1. It is incorporated into the gaming machine 1.

Through the work in each of these steps, lottery data, video, and sound data related to the group preview performance are created and incorporated as software to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Production of this video)
The main video production process for group previews will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52. 49 to 52 are diagrams for explaining an example of this video production process.

As shown in FIG. 49, first, in STEP 1, character images to be used in the group preview are prepared. For example, in the group preview, the main character Yumu-chan is used, and four images g1 to g4 are prepared to represent Yumu-chan running. Note that such character images are created in the animation production process.

Next, in STEP 2, a video in which the character steps is created using the four character images g1 to g4 using a video creation tool. For example, when a video creation tool is started, a timeline screen 710 is displayed. In the timeline screen 710, one or more layers are arranged on the vertical axis, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. Each layer is arranged in numerical order from the top, such as layer 1, 2, 3, etc., and the higher the layer is arranged (that is, the lower the number), the closer the image is to the back side on the screen of the image display device 5. It is supposed to be located. The number of layers and the width of the time axis can be set to values desired by the user.

In STEP 2, each character image g1 to g4 is arranged in a column of a predetermined layer. For example, in the example shown in (a), character images g1 to g4 are arranged on the timeline corresponding to layer 1, and constitute video data A1 to A4. According to the video data A1 to A4, the stepping video has a pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4.

If the set of video data A1 to A4 of stepping created as described above is repeatedly arranged on the timeline, the video of the character stepping will be repeated. For example, in the example shown in (b), the moving image data A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles. Then, this stepping video data is output. In this way, stepping videos of other characters are created in the same way.

As shown in FIG. 50, in STEP 3, a moving image in which the character advances is created. First, the screen size of the image display device 5 is set to a predetermined size. For example, in the example shown in (a), the width of the X axis along the horizontal direction on the screen is set to 800, and the width of the XY axis along the vertical direction on the screen is set to 640. Note that the value corresponding to the center position on both the X-axis and the Y-axis is 0. Therefore, the screen size is -400≦X≦400 and -320≦Y≦320.

By using the settings screen 730 of the video creation tool, it is possible to set the width by which the video data moves. For example, in the example shown in (b), one cycle of stepping video data A1 to A4 of the pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4 is set to 500, and the character images are moved linearly on the X axis within the range of -1000≦X≦500. is set to .

As shown in FIG. 51, in STEP 4, a moving image in which a plurality of characters advance is created. For example, in the example shown in (a), video data in which a character named Jam-chan used in the group preview moves linearly on the X-axis within the range of -1000≦X≦500 is created using the same creation procedure.

As mentioned above, if you create video data for multiple characters that move linearly on the Deploy. Furthermore, by shifting the time axes between characters, it is possible to shift the timing of their appearance. Furthermore, by shifting the Y-axis positions between the characters, it is possible to shift the positions on the Y-axis where the characters appear. Note that the Z-axis is an axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen, and by inputting a value, the Z axis is the axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen. The performance of the group preview (the Boingo group preview in this embodiment) can be designed so that the characters move between the two sides.

As shown in FIG. 52, in STEP 5, a group preview video is finally created. For example, as shown in (a), a group preview video is completed by placing video data of six types of characters, characters A to F, on the timeline of the layer.

Also, by changing the length of the video data on the timeline, the animation itself can change the speed at which the character moves while maintaining a video in which a pattern of character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three periods. Can be done. For example, like the video data of character C placed on layer 9, the video data of character C placed on layer 10 is video data in which a video pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three periods. , the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed in layer 10 is shorter than the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed in layer 9. As a result, character C placed on layer 10 will move on the screen at a faster speed than character C placed on layer 9, while maintaining the same animation as character C placed on layer 9. .

Note that in the six-person group preview, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed at the coordinates placed on the screen. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 52(a) as well, video data of a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same length on the timeline.

Furthermore, as shown in (b), if the moving image data of the sand smoke is arranged in layer 1 located on the rearmost side, the moving image of the sand smoke can be combined with the moving image in which a plurality of characters advance.

In the manner described above, it is possible to create video data of a group preview in which a plurality of characters advance. In addition, in the actual creation of the group preview video data, it is assumed that the game board 2 will cover the edge of a screen of a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches), and the game board 2 will cover the screen. Group preview video data is created with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position. Furthermore, so that it can be applied to a screen of a larger size (eg, 20 inches) than a predetermined screen size (eg, 19 inches), group preview video data is created up to the area corresponding to the larger size.

(Group advance notice work process)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the overall picture of the six-person group preview. As shown in FIG. 53, in the six-person group preview included in the group preview performance, an image of six characters, Maid A to Maid F, advancing as a group is displayed. The group preview performance is not limited to six characters, but a plurality of each character appears, so that among the performances that can be executed in the pachinko game machine 1, the group preview performance has the largest number of characters displayed. Maid A to Maid F are all wearing the same or substantially the same maid outfits, making it difficult to distinguish the types of characters other than recognizing them by their faces. In this embodiment, the designs of the aprons worn by each character are different for each character, but it is difficult to recognize the differences at first glance. Note that maid A is Yumu-chan, who is the main character, and maid B is Jam-chan, who is the character with the next highest priority after Yumu-chan, who is the protagonist.

In the six-person group preview, sometimes the character image fits within the display area of the image display device 5, and sometimes a part of the character image (for example, the face or legs) does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. In some cases. For example, among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, six maid A (Mume-chan) appear, but only five of them have faces visible. That is, among the six maids who appear, one of the maids A's face does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid B (Jam-chan) appear, but only four of them have faces visible. That is, among the five maids B who appear, one face does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, five Maid C's appear, but only three of them have their faces visible. That is, the faces of two of the five maids C who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid Ds appear, of which only three Maid D's faces can be seen. That is, the faces of two of the five maids D who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid E's appear, but only three of them have their faces visible. That is, the faces of two of the five maids E who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Among the characters that appear in the six-person group preview, five Maid Fs appear, of which only three Maid F's faces can be seen. That is, the faces of two of the five maids F who appear do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5.

In this way, there are two types of characters displayed in a group preview performance: characters whose whole bodies fit within the display area of the screen, and characters whose whole bodies (for example, faces) do not fit within the display area of the screen. This includes a character whose other parts of the whole body (for example, parts other than the face) are displayed within the display area of the screen.

In addition, the multiple characters displayed in the group preview are characters with low importance in the content of the pachinko machine 1, such as maids C to F, and maids A (Yume-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan). In the content of pachinko machine 1, maids C to F are more important characters than maids C to F, and maids A and B are more important than maids C to F because their faces do not fit within the display area of the screen. The proportion of parts other than the face that are displayed within the display area of the screen is low. In other words, the six-person group preview is designed so that Maid A and Maid B appear more often while showing their faces than Maid C to F.

(auxiliary display)
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the auxiliary display used in the group preview effect. As shown in FIG. 54, in the group preview performance, an auxiliary display is performed to emphasize that the characters are progressing. In this embodiment, an image of sand smoke is displayed as the auxiliary display. By displaying an image of sand smoke near the character, or more effectively, following the advancing character, it is possible to make the player think that the sand smoke is being generated by the progress of the character. This allows you to emphasize the way the character runs through the scene. As shown in FIG. 52(b) described above, the image of sand smoke, which is the auxiliary display, is arranged in layer 1 located on the rearmost side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54, the image of the sand cloud is positioned further back than any of the appearing characters.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, the layer on which Maid E's image is placed is on the front side of the layer on which Maid C's image is placed, so Maid E's image is lower than Maid C's image. is also displayed on the front side. On the other hand, the auxiliary display image corresponding to Maid E is located on the back side of both Maid E's image and Maid C's image.

In this way, when the display of maid E and the display of maid C overlap, the display of the maid E is given priority over the display of the other maid C, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is When the display of Maid C overlaps, the display of Maid C is given priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to Maid E.

(motion blur processing)
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining motion blur processing used in group preview presentation. As shown in FIG. 55, in the group preview presentation, motion blur processing is applied to the advancing characters. Motion blur processing is a process for displaying an afterimage of an object (for example, a character), and by applying motion blur processing to the display of an advancing character, the afterimage of the character is displayed after the advancing character. It will be displayed. This makes it possible to create a lively group preview effect. In addition, when an image resulting from motion blur processing for one character overlaps an image resulting from motion blur processing for another character, the motion blur processing for that character may be applied to avoid obstructing the visibility of the other character. The image is transparent.

(Aspects of outline when characters overlap)
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the form of outlines when characters overlap in a group preview performance. As shown in FIG. 56, in the group preview presentation, one character may overtake the other characters. At this time, when the display of the overtaking character and the display of another character overlap, the outline of the overtaking character is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character.

For example, in the example shown in (a), maid B, who is located in front of maid A, is shown passing maid A. In this case, the outline of maid B is larger than that of maid A. It is thicker, and Maid B is displayed with more emphasis than Maid A. Also, it is shown that Maid A, who is located in front of Maid F, overtakes Maid F, but in this case, the outline of Maid A is thicker than the outline of Maid F, and Maid A is It is displayed more emphatically than Maid F.

Furthermore, in the example shown in (b), it is shown that maid B, who is located in front of maid A, overtakes maid A, but in this case, the outline of maid B is smaller than the outline of maid A. It is thicker, and Maid B is displayed with more emphasis than Maid A. Also, it is shown that Maid A, who is located in front of Maid D, overtakes Maid D, but in this case, the outline of Maid A is thicker than that of Maid D, and Maid A is It is displayed more emphatically than Maid D.

In addition, when one character overtakes another character, it is not limited to making the outline of the first character thicker, but also making the size of the first character larger or making the brightness of the first character higher than the brightness of the other character. One character may be displayed more emphatically than the other characters by making the contrast of one character higher or by making the contrast of one character clearer than the contrast of other characters.

(Display on screen of image display device)
FIG. 57 is a diagram looking into the space between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 during execution of the group preview performance. As shown in FIGS. 54 to 56 described above, since the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front, the screen of the image display device 5 is Of the edges, the portion covered by the game board 2 is no longer visible. However, as shown in FIG. 57, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 is visible.

Here, in FIG. 57, in the six-person group preview, as shown in (a), while the entirety of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is not yet displayed, a part of the maid A (in this example From the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, as shown in (b), while the whole of Maid A that was initially displayed is not yet displayed, a part of Maid A is displayed in the first situation. The second maid B (Jam-chan) is displayed more than the situation, and while the entirety of the second maid B (Jam-chan) is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of her face in this example) is displayed. It has been shown that the situation will occur. Furthermore, the character displayed first (maid A) and the character displayed second (maid B) have different positional coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction on the screen.

Such a change from the first situation to the second situation occurs when the image display device 5 is visually recognized with the game board 2 covering the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the game board 2 and the image display This occurs regardless of whether the image display device 5 is viewed while looking into the space between the image display device 5 and the device 5. In other words, FIG. 57 shows a case where the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, but as shown in FIG. 17(b), the game board 2 is the image display device Even if the edge of the screen in 5 is covered, in the 6-person group preview, the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is still not shown in its entirety, but a part of the maid A (in this example) From the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, the whole of the maid A that was initially displayed is not yet displayed, but a part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and 2 A second situation occurs in which the entirety of the maid B (Jam-chan) who was displayed is not displayed yet, but a part of the maid B (in this example, a part of the face) is displayed.

(Overall picture of Bakuchu group preview)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the overall picture of the Bakuchu group preview. As shown in FIG. 58, in the Bakuchu group preview included in the group preview performance, an image of characters such as Bakuchu advancing in a group is displayed.

In the Bakuchu group preview, sometimes the character image fits within the display area of the image display device 5, and sometimes a part of the character image (for example, ears or feet) does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. Sometimes there are.

In this way, in the Bakuchu group preview, the moving image data of the Bakuchu group preview is created by arranging on the screen an image of an animation in which one type of character moves as if it were moving. Note that the video data for the Bakuchu group preview is also created based on the work steps shown in FIGS. 48 to 52 using the same method as the video data for the 6-person group preview.

(Volume change and brightness data table in group preview performance)
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining a change in volume and a brightness data table in a group preview performance. As shown in FIG. 59, the group preview effects (6-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, Boingo group preview) have a first display period (1000 msec), a second display period (1310 msec), and a third display period (830 msec). It is divided into

The first display period is a period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends for the first time in the group preview performance. More specifically, the first display period is a period from when any character first appears in the group preview presentation until when any character first disappears. For example, if one character appears first in a group preview presentation and the one character continues to advance at the top, the period until the one character disappears becomes the first display period. Alternatively, if one character appears first in a group preview presentation and is overtaken by another character, the first display period is the period until the other character disappears from the edge of the screen. . In this embodiment, in the first display period, the display of the second displayed character ends before the display of the first displayed character ends. That is, in the first display period, the first character appears, is overtaken by the second character that appears, and then the second character disappears from the edge of the screen first.

The second display period is longer than the first display period, and is a period during which the display of a new character continues to start and end. More specifically, during the second display period, after one of the characters first disappears in the group preview performance, new characters continue to appear one after another, and the last character disappears. This is the period until it appears. Note that the second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period. Furthermore, the number of characters appearing in the second display period is greater than in each of the first display period and the third display period.

The third display period is a period in which the display of a character continues to end without the display of a new character starting. More specifically, the third display period is a period from when the last character appears in the group preview presentation until all the characters disappear. Note that the character that disappears last is not limited to the character that appears last, but may be a character that is removed by the character that appears last. Note that the third display period is longer than the first display period.

Regarding the change in volume in the group preview performance, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and change the volume of the performance sound in the first display period. The volume is increased to a specific volume, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is lowered during the third display period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 58, the sound volume corresponding to the group preview performance is at the minimum volume (for example, muted or lowest volume) at the beginning of the first display period, and then gradually increases in volume. Once the specified value is reached, the specified value (for example, the set volume or maximum volume) is maintained thereafter. Even in the second display period, the volume remains at the specified value. Thereafter, in the third display period, the volume is maintained at the specified value, and then gradually decreases step by step until it reaches the minimum.

Note that the gradual increase in the volume in stages from the minimum to the specified value during the first display period is referred to as volume fade-in. Further, the gradual decrease in the volume from the specified value to the minimum in the third display period is referred to as a volume fade-out. In this embodiment, the fade-in time from when the production sound is output in the first display period until the volume of the production sound increases from the minimum to the specified value is such that the volume of the production sound decreases during the third display period. This is shorter than the fade-out time from the start until the volume of the performance sound reaches its minimum.

The brightness data table includes a plurality of brightness data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means. The plurality of lighting means include the frame lamp 9 (frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, and electric lamp. Includes game effect lamps such as a chew lamp 9H, a stick controller lamp 9J, and a trigger button lamp 9K. The brightness data table includes a first brightness data table corresponding to the first display period, a second brightness data table corresponding to the second display period, and a third brightness data table corresponding to the third display period. . That is, in the first display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data included in the first brightness data table, and in the second display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data included in the In the third display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data included in the third brightness data table. Or turn off.

(Timing of occurrence of 6-person group notice in Stage A)
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of a six-person group notice in stage A. As described above, in stage A, the six-person group preview is executed from the 1600th frame during the pre-variation.

For example, as shown in Figure 60, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 9 that loses in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the subsequent variation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). Therefore, the six-person group preview starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous change. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9 in which SP reach is lost in the first half, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the second half of the total variation time (2984 frames). In other words, if you lose in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result ( 2984 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the second half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that wins in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the 6-person group preview is as follows. It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous variation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that is a hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4662 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (1600th frame) at which the six-person group notice is executed is the timing (2331st frame) close to half of the total variation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 23 that hits in the second half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the 6-person group preview is as follows. It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous variation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 23 that is a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the latter half of the SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4861 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is a timing close to half (approximately 2430th frame) of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 26 that will win at the final reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the 6-person group notice is It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 26 that results in a win in the final reach, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). In other words, if the final reach is a win, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period (6149 frame), the first display period of the six-person group preview starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the six-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is a timing close to half (approximately 3074th frame) of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). (second half).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the after fluctuation time is set to be long, so the relevant change is made after the variable display starts. In the predetermined period until the variable display suggests that the display result is a loss, the first display period of the six-person group preview is not configured to start in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. . However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result is In the predetermined period, the first display period of the six-person group preview may be configured to start in the first half of the predetermined period.

FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of the Bakuchu group notice in Stage B. As described above, in stage B, the Bakuchu group preview is executed from the 2000th frame during the post-fluctuation.

For example, as shown in Figure 61, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 9 that loses in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), and the variation time of the subsequent variation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). Therefore, the Bakuchu group preview starts from the 66,600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous change. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 9 that results in a loss in the first half of the SP reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). In other words, if you lose in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result ( 2984 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview starts in the second half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that wins in the first half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the Bakuchu group preview is , starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 20 that is a hit in the first half of SP reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the first half of SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4662 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Bakuchu group preview is executed (2000th frame) is a timing close to half (2331st frame) of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames). (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 23 that hits in the second half of SP reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the Bakuchu group preview is , starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 23 that is a hit in the latter half of SP reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). In other words, if there is a win in the latter half of the SP reach, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a win display result ( 4861 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (approximately 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). It's the timing (second half).

In the case of the variation pattern with variation number 26 that hits in the second half of the final reach, the variation time of the previous variation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the variation time of the subsequent variation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the Bakuchu group preview is , starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern with variation number 26 that results in a win in the final reach, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). In other words, if the final reach is a win, it is suggested that it is a display result, and the predetermined period (6149 frame), the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (approximately 3074th frame) of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). It's the timing (second half).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the after fluctuation time is set to be long, so the relevant change is made after the variable display starts. In the predetermined period until the variable display indicates that the display result is a loss, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice is not configured to start in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. do not have. However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns with fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that result in a loss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result is In a predetermined period, the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview of the predetermined period may be configured to start.

[Brightness data]
With reference to FIGS. 62 to 86, the brightness data referred to by the performance control CPU 120 when controlling various lighting means in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. These brightness data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the lighting (light emission) location of the game effect lamp in accordance with the display in the group preview based on the brightness data stored in the brightness data table. In this embodiment, a lighting location literally refers to a location that is lit. For example, among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp, the location where a lit lamp is located is called a lighting location; A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is off) is located is not called a lit location. In addition, in other examples, a lighting location refers to a location that is lit with high brightness, for example, a location where a lamp that is lit with high brightness is located among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp is lit. A location where a lamp is lit at a lower brightness than the luminance of a lamp located at the lighting location may not be called a lighting location.

More specifically, the data (also referred to as elements) for turning on or off a lamp is defined by a brightness data table, and in such a brightness data table, the data storage area referenced by a particular lamp is If data of 0 (for example, data of "000" corresponding to RGB) is stored, the particular lamp is turned off. Further, if there is no storage area for data referenced by a specific lamp in the brightness data table, or if the brightness data table itself does not exist, the specific lamp is turned off. On the other hand, there is a brightness data table that a specific lamp refers to, and the data storage area that the specific lamp refers to contains one or more data (for example, "100", "010", "001" corresponding to RGB). is stored, the specific lamp lights up.For example, when a specific performance such as a jackpot preview performance is executed during a performance corresponding to a normal background, the lamp that is referenced in the specific performance is Even if data for a specific lamp is not specified in the brightness data table, if data for a specific lamp is specified in the brightness data table that is referenced in the production corresponding to the normal background, the specific lamp will be lit. I will do it.

(Parent table in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the group preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 62, the parent table in the group preview brightness data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, top board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, the performance time of each group preview performance is defined.

For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled for 3140 msec to match the group preview performance.

(Child table in group preview luminance data table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 63, in the child table of the group preview brightness data table, the time of the group preview effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table ) is specified.

For example, in the first display period (the period of the effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 96 and FIGS. 151 to 153, which will be described later), of the period in which the group preview effect is executed, the frame lamp is W1, and the accessory lamp 9A is Grandchild tables Y1, L1 for the board left lamp 9B, U1 for the top lamp 9C, and A1 for the attacker lamp 9E are provided, respectively. These grandchild tables used in the first display period correspond to the first luminance data table shown in FIG. 59.

In the second display period (the period of the effects shown in FIGS. 97, 98, 154, and 155, which will be described later), during the period in which the group preview effect is executed, W2 is displayed for the frame lamp, Y2 is displayed for the accessory lamp 9A, A grandchild table of L2 is provided for the board left lamp 9B, U2 is provided for the onboard lamp 9C, and A2 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables used in the second display period correspond to the second luminance data table shown in FIG. 59.

During the period in which the group preview effect is executed, in the third display period (the effect period shown in FIGS. 99, 100, 156, and 157, which will be described later), the frame lamp is W3, the accessory lamp 9A is Y3, A grandchild table of L3 is provided for the board left lamp 9B, U3 is provided for the on board lamp 9C, and A3 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables used in the third display period correspond to the third luminance data table shown in FIG. 59.

As shown in FIG. 63, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the group preview effect, the frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R, Six types of brightness data tables are provided: object lamp 9A, panel left lamp 9B, panel top lamp 9C, and attacker lamp.

Note that the V lamp 9G is located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance (for example, near where the characters appear in the group preview performance), but since it is not used in the group preview performance, its grandchild table Also not available. The V lamp 9G is a lamp that informs that the round is in a jackpot game state where a V winning can occur, that a V winning has occurred, or a lamp that notifies that a jackpot has occurred, so it is used in the group preview performance. This is because if the lights turn on, players will think that they have won a V prize or hit the jackpot.To avoid this kind of inconvenience, the V lamp 9G is used in the group preview presentation. Not yet. Note that the V lamp 9G may be provided at other positions, such as near the board left lamp 9B, as a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance. It is sufficient that it is not used in .

In addition, the stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A and the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B are positioned at positions related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance (for example, in the group preview performance, the characters advance). (nearly directly below the scene), but since it is not used in the group preview performance, its grandchild table is not prepared either. The stick controller lamp 9J lights up to prompt a pull operation on the stick controller 31A during an operation performance (the performance shown in FIG. 132 (c91) described later), etc., and the trigger button lamp 9K lights up to prompt a pull operation of the stick controller 31A during a PUSH performance (the performance shown in FIG. 93 (described later)). This lamp is lit to prompt the user to press the push button 31B in the performance shown in a19), so if it is lit during the group preview performance, the player cannot operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In order to avoid such inconvenience, the stick controller lamp 9J and trigger button lamp 9K are not used in the group preview presentation. Note that the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K may be provided at other positions, such as near the board left lamp 9B, as positions related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview performance; However, it is sufficient that it is not used in the group preview performance.

The characteristics of the grandchild tables W1 to W3 used as grandchild tables in the group preview presentation are summarized as follows. Specifically, the number of high-intensity lighting locations is greater in W2 than in W1. Regarding the switching interval, W1 performs lighting control at equal intervals of 100 msec, whereas W2 performs lighting control at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec, which is shorter than W1, and W3 performs lighting control at irregular intervals of 10 msec for the frame left lamp 9L. While the lighting control is performed at short intervals of 80 msec, the lighting control of the frame right lamp 9R is performed at long intervals of 80 msec.

Regarding the lighting pattern, the brightness data for W1 is stipulated so that the lights are lit at high brightness while moving the lighting locations according to the direction of advance of the group notice, whereas for W2, the lights are lit at high brightness across multiple locations. For W3, the brightness data is specified so that both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low brightness according to the direction of advance of the group notice. There is. Regarding the initial brightness data, the brightness data for W1 is specified so that all the lamps are turned off or lit at low brightness, whereas for W2 and W3, the brightness data is specified so that predetermined lighting locations are made to emit light at high brightness. Brightness data is specified. On the other hand, regarding the last luminance data, W3 is defined such that all the lamps, both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R, are turned off or turned on at low brightness.

Regarding the luminance data loop, W1 and W3 are not defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used, whereas W2's luminance data is defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used. Regarding brightness data for 10 minutes for troubleshooting purposes, W1 and W3 are defined, whereas W2 is not defined.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group preview luminance data table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the group preview brightness data table. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), in the grandchild table W1 used in the first display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, Furthermore, at the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting. In addition, in W1, first luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or lighting each lamp included in the frame lamp at low luminance and data for lighting each lamp at high luminance for each time; A combination of data for turning off or lighting each lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness is composed of second brightness data different from the first brightness data. For example, if a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-2 is set as first luminance data, a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-3 can be set as second luminance data. Predetermined brightness data is also defined for other times.

In W1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for "R" for all lamps included in the frame lamp, "G" and " “B” is defined as “0” indicating that the light is off. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (a22) and FIG. 151 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or turned on at low brightness. It becomes like this. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to make the effect effective by lighting each lamp mainly in red, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for "R", and "1" indicating low brightness is specified for "G" and "B". For example, when each lamp lights up mainly in green, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for "G", and "R" and "B" are defined as "0" indicating off. It is sufficient if “0” indicating off is specified for “B”, and “1” indicating low brightness is specified for “B” when each lamp lights up mainly in blue, and “OFF” is specified for “R” and “G”. ``0'' indicating ``0'' may be specified.

In addition, in W1, as shown by the dotted arrow, from T1-2 to T1-10, the lamps are lit at high brightness from near the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 to the frame left lamp at equal intervals of 100 msec. The brightness data is specified so that it moves by . Here, the areas around the right frame lamps 9R5 to 9R8 correspond to the locations where the characters appear in the group preview, and the brightness data is set so that the locations of the lamps lit at high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the characters advance. stipulated. The lamp on the left side of the frame is initially off or lit at low brightness, and gradually increases in intensity as the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the character moves. Brightness data is specified so that the light is turned on according to the brightness. On the other hand, the lamps 9R5 to 9R8 on the right side of the frame, which were initially lit at high brightness, will turn off or turn off at low brightness as the lamps that are lit at high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the character moves. Brightness data is specified in . As a result, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 96 and FIGS. 151 to 153, which will be described later, the frame lamp also moves from the right side of the pachinko machine 1 in accordance with the progress of the characters appearing from the right end of the screen in the group preview. The position of the high-intensity light will change towards the left side.

In addition, W1 includes data for lighting one frame lamp at high brightness and extinguishing other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp, and the brightness is set so that the parts of the lamps that are lit in stages move. Data is specified. Thereby, in W1, the location of the lamp that is lit at high brightness can be moved in accordance with the direction in which the character is moving.

Further, in W1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the frame lamps are sparsely set to high brightness in accordance with the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamps when the next second display period is entered. The brightness data is specified so that the light will turn on at .

Here, if data for these 10 minutes were not provided, if W1 was used to control the lamp lighting and the transition to W2 did not occur due to some abnormality, the lamp lighting control would be performed again from T1-1. Even though the characters in the group preview have already appeared and the progress is progressing, as shown by the dotted arrow, from T1-2 to T1-10, the high rise again starts from near the right frame lamps 9R5 to 9R8. The part of the lamp that lights up depending on the brightness moves, giving the player a sense of discomfort. However, in this embodiment, data for 10 minutes is provided in T1-11, so even if lighting control is performed using W1 and the transition to W2 is not made due to some abnormality, the data for 10 minutes is Since the frame lamp can be turned on in a light emission mode that matches the grandchild table W2, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable. If the abnormality is resolved within these 10 minutes, the player can continue playing the game without feeling any discomfort.

In W1, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

In addition, the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes stipulated in W1 is brightness data in which adjacent frame lamps are turned on regularly in order so that the lighting points are shifted from the previous state of T1-10. be.

As shown in FIG. 64(b), in the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, RGB data is displayed for each lamp at irregular intervals from T2-1 to T2-10 every 50 to 80 msec. stipulated. In addition, in W2, first luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or lighting each lamp included in the frame lamp at low luminance and data for lighting each lamp at high luminance for each time; A combination of data for turning off or lighting each lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness is composed of second brightness data different from the first brightness data. For example, if a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-2 is set as first luminance data, a collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-3 can be set as second luminance data. Predetermined brightness data is also defined for other times.

W2 includes brightness data that causes one frame lamp to be lit at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp to be lit at high brightness, and lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit at high brightness. The brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes. For example, in W2, sparse high-brightness data (for example, "A") is defined so that the light is lit at high brightness in multiple locations. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98 and FIGS. 154 and 155, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group preview performance, the frame lamp is displayed in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in groups in the group preview performance. will start to light up sparsely and at high brightness. Further, W2 is designed to light more frame lamps at higher brightness than W1.

Note that in W2, unlike W1, luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10. Here, even if the lighting control is performed using W2 and the lamp does not shift to W3 due to some abnormality and the lamp lighting control is performed again from T2-1, the frame lamps will become sparsely high. Since the mode of lighting with brightness is simply repeated, the player does not feel particularly uncomfortable.

Also, unlike W2, it is possible to provide all the data that is referenced every time over the entire time without repeating the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10, but the time required to create each data Also, it takes time to confirm that the created data is correct, which makes it very inefficient. On the other hand, as in W2 of this embodiment, lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10, so that only one set of data that is repeatedly referenced can be created. This can improve time efficiency. The reason why lighting control is performed by repeatedly using one set of data during the second display period in the group preview performance is that the second display period in the group preview performance is longer than the first display period or the third display period. In addition, the second display period in the group preview performance is a time period in which the screen is filled with multiple characters and the multiple characters advance as a group, so the lighting corresponding to such a performance is This is because it is sufficient to repeat the same lighting mode.

As shown in FIG. 64(c), in the grandchild table W3 used in the third display period, RGB data is displayed for the frame left lamp and frame right lamp at intervals of 80 msec from T3-1 to T3-6. stipulated. After that, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp at short intervals of 10 msec from T3-7 to T3-38, and for the frame right lamp, it is continued from T3-7 to T3-38 at long intervals of 80 msec. RGB data is specified.

In addition, in W3, as shown by the dotted arrow, from T3-2 to T3-30, the lamps that were lit at high brightness from around the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 gradually turn off or become dim. Increase the number of lamps that turn off or turn on at low brightness so that they turn on at high brightness. Regarding T3-7 to T3-38, brightness data is specified at 80 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, whereas the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview. ~9L12, the brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes from high brightness to off or to low brightness at short intervals of 10 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 99, 100, 156, and 157, which will be described later, the frame lamp changes from the right side of the pachinko machine 1 to the left side in accordance with the effect in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview. The position where the light turns off or lights up at low brightness changes over time.

Furthermore, in W3, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or turned on at low brightness at the time of transition from T3 to 30. Furthermore, in W3, similarly to W1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when moving to the next performance.

In W3, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grand table for accessory lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the group preview brightness data table. As mentioned above, the accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. RRRR”. Note that each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochrome (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Note that monochromatic LEDs have fewer filters that block light than full-color LEDs, so the light is emitted more intensely. For this reason, monochrome LEDs have smaller brightness data corresponding to high brightness than full-color LEDs.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), in the grandchild table Y1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In Y1, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (a22) and FIG. 151 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are turned off or at low brightness. It will turn on. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Further, in Y1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the accessory lamp 9A is turned on in accordance with the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A when the next second display period is entered. Brightness data is specified so that the lights are sparsely lit at high brightness.

In Y1, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 65(b), in the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period, each lamp of the accessory lamp 9A is The brightness data is specified.

Y2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to be lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to be lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 97, 98, 154, and 155, which will be described later, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the characters are The lamp 9A starts to light up sparsely and with high brightness.

Note that in Y2, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided as in Y1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 65(c), in the grandchild table Y3 used in the third display period, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 80 msec from T3-1 to T3-6. . Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in Y3, similarly to Y1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the accessory lamp 9A is lit at low brightness so that the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not feel strange when moving to the next performance.

In Y3, the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grandchild table for panel left lamp in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the group preview luminance data table. As mentioned above, the panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. "WWWWW" is displayed. Note that each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "6". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED was only red, but even if it is an LED only white like the left lamp 9B, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), in the grandchild table L1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In L1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is defined for all lamps included in the panel left lamp 9B. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (a22) and FIG. 151 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the panel left lamp 9B are turned off or at low brightness. It will turn on. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Furthermore, in L1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the board left lamp 9B is set to match the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the board left lamp 9B when the next second display period is entered. Brightness data is specified so that the lights are sparsely lit at high brightness.

In L1, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 66(b), in the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period, each lamp of the panel left lamp 9B is The brightness data is specified.

L2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to be lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to be lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 97, 98, 154, and 155, which will be described later, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the left side of the board is The lamp 9B starts to light up sparsely and with high brightness.

Note that in L2, unlike in L1, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), in the grandchild table L3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. . Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in L3, similarly to L1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the board left lamp 9B is lit at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the board left lamp 9B when moving to the next performance.

In L3, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Grand table for on-board lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the group preview brightness data table. As mentioned above, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13, and each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 has a plurality of colors (in this example, red (red)). The LED has three colors: R), green (G), and blue (B), and the brightness is expressed as hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Thus, the high brightness values used in multi-color LEDs are larger than the high brightness values used in single-color LEDs. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED was only red, but even if it is an LED only white like the lamp on the panel 9C, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), in the grandchild table U1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In U1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is defined for all lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (a22) and FIG. 151 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, all the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C are off or at low brightness. It will turn on. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Further, in U1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the on-board lamp 9C is set in accordance with the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when moving to the next second display period. Brightness data is specified so that the lights are sparsely lit at high brightness.

In U1, since the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 67(b), in the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period, each lamp on the board lamp 9C is The brightness data is specified.

U2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to be lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to be lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 97, 98, 154, and 155, which will be described later, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the board is displayed in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in groups in the group preview performance. The lamp 9C starts to light up sparsely and with high brightness.

Note that in U2, unlike U1, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided, so the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 67(c), in the grandchild table U3 used in the third display period, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. . Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in U3, similarly to U1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the on-board lamp 9C is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when moving to the next performance.

In U3, since the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

Note that in all of U1, U2, and U3, only data "0" is defined for the monochromatic on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8. That is, the lamps 9C6 to 9C8 on the board are not used in the group preview presentation.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in group preview luminance data table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the group preview brightness data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to The brightness is expressed as a hexadecimal number "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to lighting, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and its brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "6". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “6” are data corresponding to turning on, respectively. Among "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Thus, the high brightness values used in multi-color LEDs are larger than the high brightness values used in single-color LEDs. In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if it is an LED only white like the V attacker lamp 9F, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the grandchild table A1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and At the final time T1-11, 10 minutes (600000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

In A1, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is defined for all lamps in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94 (a22) and FIG. 151 (b43), which will be described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview effect, the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are turned off. Or it will turn on at low brightness. Thereby, it is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

Furthermore, in A1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, each lamp is set to a high brightness sparsely in accordance with the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of each lamp when moving to the next second display period. The brightness data is specified so that the light will turn on at .

In A1, since the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data ranging from T1-1 to T1-10. .

As shown in FIG. 68(b), in the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, luminance data is specified for each lamp from T2-1 to T2-10 at non-uniform intervals of 50 to 80 msec. has been done.

A2 includes brightness data that causes one lamp to be lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to the one lamp to be lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). The brightness data is defined as follows. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 97, 98, 154, and 155, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group preview performance, the attacker lamp is displayed in accordance with the appearance of the characters advancing in a group in the group preview performance. 9E, electric lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F begin to light up sparsely and with high brightness.

Note that in A2, brightness data for troubleshooting is not provided as in A1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 68(c), in the grandchild table A3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. Thereafter, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in A3, similarly to A1, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9H will be turned on so that there will be no discomfort in the lighting mode of the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F when moving to the next production. The brightness data is defined so that the lamp 9F is turned off or turned on at low brightness.

In A3, brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes as mentioned above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using brightness data ranging from T3-1 to T3-38. .

(Parent table in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the reach line brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 69, the parent table in the reach line brightness data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each performance time of the reach line performance is defined.

The reach line performance is different from the group preview performance, and is a performance that foretells that the display result of the variable display using special symbols or decorative symbols will be the display result in which the jackpot symbol stops. It is a performance that suggests (or informs) people. In the reach line effect, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92 and FIGS. 139 to 142, which will be described later, a streak of light (also referred to as a reach line) appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5 with a flash of light. , the reach line expands inwardly and outwardly (in the left-right direction) to connect the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach, shrinks and expands, and then the reach line disappears.

In the parent table of the reach line brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 1500 msec to match the reach line performance.

(child table in reach line data table)
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach line brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 70, in the child table of the reach line brightness data table, the time of the reach line effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table ) is specified.

For example, during the period in which the reach line effect is executed, during the period in which flash occurs (the effect period shown in FIGS. 89(a8), (a9) and FIGS. 139(a8), (a9), which will be described later), the frame Grandchild tables W11 for the lamp, Y11 for the accessory lamp 9A, L11 for the board left lamp 9B, U11 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A11 for the attacker lamp 9E are provided.

During the period in which the reach line effect is executed, in the period in which the reach line occurs (the effect period shown in FIGS. 90 and 140 described later), the frame lamp is W12, the accessory lamp 9A is Y12, and the board left lamp. L12 grandchild tables are provided for each node 9B. Note that during the period in which the reach line occurs, the on-board lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E are not used, so no grandchild table is prepared.

During the period during which the reach line effect is executed, the reach line extends inward and outward and expands while contracting (as shown in FIGS. 91 (a13) to 92 (b17) and FIGS. 141 (a13) to 142 (b17), which will be described later). During the production period), the following grandchild tables are provided: W13 for the frame lamp, Y13 for the accessory lamp 9A, L13 for the board left lamp 9B, U13 for the top board lamp 9C, and A13 for the attacker lamp 9E.

During the period when the reach line performance is executed, during the period when the reach line disappears (the period of the performance shown in FIG. 92 (a18) and FIG. 142 (b18) described later), the frame lamp is W14, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y14. , L14 for the board left lamp 9B, U14 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A14 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 70, regarding the brightness data table referenced in the reach line effect, the left side of the frame is Six types of brightness data tables are provided: a lamp 9L, a frame right lamp 9R, an accessory lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a top board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp. On the other hand, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the reach line effect, in the brightness data table referred to during the period in which the reach line occurs, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the accessory lamp 9A, and the board left lamp 9B. Four types of brightness data tables are provided.

In this way, in the reach line performance, brightness data tables are provided for the same number of lamps as the group preview performance or fewer lamps than the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), in the grandchild table W11, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. The reach line performance is a performance that suggests to the player that the game is now reachable, and is not a performance that arouses the player's expectations by suggesting a jackpot like the group preview performance. For this reason, the reach line performance does not perform elaborate lighting control such as providing different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually, as in the group preview performance. Common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, so that each lamp is controlled together. Furthermore, since the execution time of the reach line effect is shorter than that of the group preview effect, it is difficult to set up different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and control each lamp individually, as in the group preview effect. Rather than performing lighting control based on the lighting control, common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together.

In W11, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89 (a8) and FIG. 139 (b8), which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit at high brightness at the timing when a flash occurs. .

As shown in FIG. 71(b), in the grandchild table W12, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W12, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 140, which will be described later, while the reach line occurs, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness. The brightness data is specified so that the light will turn on at .

As shown in FIG. 71(c), in the grandchild table W13, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is defined, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W13, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 141, which will be described later, while the reach line occurs, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness. The brightness data is specified so that the light will turn on at .

As shown in FIG. 71(d), in the grandchild table W14, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W14, brightness data is defined for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), and its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 92 (a18) and FIG. 142 (b18), which will be described later, the frame lamp also goes out as the reach line goes out.

(Grand table for accessory lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining an example of an accessory lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochrome (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), in the grandchild table Y11, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89 (a8) and FIG. 139 (b8), which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit at high brightness at the timing when a flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), in the grandchild table Y12, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 140, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit at high brightness while a reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 72(c), in the grandchild table Y13, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T13-1 to T13-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 141, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit at high brightness while a reach line occurs.

As shown in FIG. 72(d), in the grandchild table Y14, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0". Thereby, as shown in FIG. 92 (a18) and FIG. 142 (b18), which will be described later, the accessory lamp 9A also goes out in conjunction with the reach line disappearing.

(Grand table for panel left lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the board left lamp in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), in the grandchild table L11, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89 (a8) and FIG. 139 (b8), which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that all the lamps included in the panel left lamp 9B are lit at high brightness at the timing when a flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 73(b), in the grandchild table L12, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 140, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all lamps included in the board left lamp 9B are lit at high brightness while a reach line occurs.

As shown in FIG. 73(c), in the grandchild table L13, luminance data is defined for the left lamp 9B at intervals of 60 msec from T13-1 to T13-4. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 141, which will be described later, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the board left lamp 9B are lit at high brightness while a reach line occurs.

As shown in FIG. 73(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B over 100 msec (T14-1), but its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 92 (a18) and FIG. 142 (b18), which will be described later, the board left lamp 9B also goes out at the same time as the reach line goes out.

(Grand table for on-board lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. Brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), in the grandchild table U11, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89 (a8) and FIG. 139 (b8), which will be described later, at the timing when the flash occurs, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 among the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C are Brightness data is specified so that the light is lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74(b), in the grandchild table U13, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 141, which will be described later, while the reach line is occurring, lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 among the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C are lit with high brightness. The brightness data is defined as follows.

As shown in FIG. 74(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over 100 msec (T14-1), but its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 92 (a18) and FIG. 142 (b18), which will be described later, the on-board lamp 9C also goes out in conjunction with the reach line disappearing.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the reach line brightness data table. Note that each of the attacker lamp 9E and electric lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". ” to “F” represent the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), in the grandchild table A11, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 89 (a8) and FIG. 139 (b8), which will be described later, at the timing when a flash occurs, the brightness is set so that the attacker lamp 9E, electric lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are lit at high brightness. Data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), in the grandchild table A13, luminance data is defined for each lamp at intervals of 60 msec from T13-1 to T13-4. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 141, which will be described later, the brightness data is specified so that the attacker lamp 9E, electric tube lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are lit at high brightness while the reach line is generated. There is.

As shown in FIG. 75(d), in the grandchild table A14, brightness data is defined for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), and its value is "0". As a result, as shown in FIG. 92 (a18) and FIG. 142 (b18), which will be described later, the attacker lamp 9E, electric chew lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F are also turned off in conjunction with the disappearance of the reach line.

(Parent table in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the background preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 76, the parent table in the background preview brightness data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, the performance time of each background preview performance is defined.

The background preview performance is different from the group preview performance, and is a performance that foretells that the display result of the variable display using special symbols or decorative symbols will be the display result in which the jackpot symbol stops. chan) is displayed with a specific background (for example, a starry sky background).

In the parent table of the background preview brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 5500 msec to match the background preview performance.

(Child table in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background preview brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 77, in the child table of the background preview brightness data table, the time of the background preview effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table ) is specified.

For example, in the first 2000 msec of the period in which the background preview effect is executed, W21 is displayed for the frame lamp, Y21 is used for the accessory lamp 9A, L21 is used for the left lamp 9B, U21 is used for the top lamp 9C, and U21 is used for the attacker lamp 9E. A grandchild table of A21 is provided respectively.

During the 100 msec period during which the background preview effect is executed, W22 for the frame lamp, Y22 for the accessory lamp 9A, L22 for the board left lamp 9B, U22 for the top lamp 9C, and A22 for the attacker lamp 9E. There is a table for each grandchild.

During the last 600,000 msec of the period in which the background preview effect is executed, W23 for the frame lamp, Y23 for the accessory lamp 9A, L23 for the board left lamp 9B, U23 for the top lamp 9C, and A23 for the attacker lamp 9E. There is a table for each grandchild.

As shown in FIG. 77, regarding the luminance data table referred to in the background preview effect, in the first 200 msec, the middle 100 msec, and the last 600000 msec, the left frame lamp 9L, the right frame lamp 9R, the accessory lamp 9A Six types of brightness data tables are provided: , panel left lamp 9B, panel top lamp 9C, and attacker lamp.

In this way, in the background preview performance, brightness data tables are provided for the same number of lamps as in the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), in the grandchild table W21, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W21, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), in the grandchild table W22, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W22, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 78(c), in the grandchild table W23, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is Common data is used symmetrically with the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W23, brightness data is defined for each lamp over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochrome (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), in the grandchild table Y21, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), in the grandchild table Y22, brightness data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A at intervals of 20 msec from T22-1 to T22-2.

As shown in FIG. 79(c), in the grandchild table Y23, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grand table for panel left lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), in the grandchild table L21, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), in the grandchild table L22, luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 80(c), in the grandchild table L23, luminance data is defined for the left lamp 9B over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grand table for on-board lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining an example of an on-board lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. Brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), in the grandchild table U21, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 81(b), in the grandchild table U22, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 81(c), in the grandchild table U23, luminance data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining an example of an attacker lamp grandchild table in the background preview brightness data table. Note that each of the attacker lamp 9E and electric lamp 9H is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". ” to “F” represent the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochrome (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to lighting, respectively. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), in the grandchild table A21, the brightness is adjusted for each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, electric lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F from T21-1 to T21-2 at 50 msec intervals. Data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), in the grandchild table A22, the brightness is adjusted for each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, electric lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F from T22-1 to T22-2 at 20 msec intervals. Data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 82(c), in the grandstand table A23, each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, electric tube lamp 9H, and V attacker lamp 9F is activated from T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec. Luminance data is defined for .

(Brightness data table when all lights on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during full lighting. As shown in FIGS. 83(a) to (h), in the brightness data table when all lights are on, the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, top board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, High brightness brightness data (in this example, "F" which is the maximum value) is specified for each game effect lamp 9 such as the electric chew lamp 9H, the V lamp 9G, the stick controller lamp 9J, and the trigger button lamp 9K. There is.

(Brightness data table during PUSH performance)
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during PUSH performance. The PUSH performance is a performance that prompts the user to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 93 (a19), which will be described later.

FIG. 84(a) shows a brightness data table S41 for the stick controller lamp 9J. In S41, brightness data is defined for the stick controller lamp 9J over T41-1 to T41-4 at intervals of 20 msec. The lighting color of the stick controller lamp 9J during the PUSH performance is the same color (red in this example) as the lighting color of the frame lamp etc. during the group preview performance.

FIG. 84(b) shows a brightness data table T41 for the trigger button lamp 9K. At T41, brightness data is defined for the trigger button lamp 9K over T51-1 to T512 at intervals of 150 msec. The lighting color of the trigger button lamp 9K during the PUSH performance is the same color (red in this example) as the lighting color of the frame lamp etc. during the group preview performance.

(Child table in group preview luminance data table according to modification)
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group preview luminance data table according to the modification. As shown in FIG. 85, in the child table in the group preview brightness data table according to the modified example, the time of the group preview effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table that is referred to in each time period. (also referred to as a brightness data table) is specified.

For example, during the period in which the group preview effect is executed, during the period (2000 msec) up to the middle of the first display period, W101 is for the frame lamp, Y101 is for the accessory lamp 9A, L101 is for the left lamp 9B, L101 is the top lamp. Grandchild tables U101 and A101 are provided for the attacker lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the first luminance data table according to the modified example.

During the period in which the group preview effect is executed, for the remainder of the first display period, the second display period, and the middle of the third display period (2790 msec), the frame lamp is W102, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y102. , L102 for the board left lamp 9B, U102 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A102 for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables correspond to the second luminance data table according to the modification.

In the remaining period (150 msec) of the third display period during which the group preview effect is executed, W103 for the frame lamp, Y103 for the accessory lamp 9A, L103 for the board left lamp 9B, and U103 for the top lamp 9C. , and the grandchild table of A103 are provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables correspond to the third luminance data table according to the modification.

In this way, in the group preview brightness data table according to the modified example, in the first brightness data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 starts at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and during the first display period, control of the game effect lamp 9 starts. The control of the game effect lamp 9 is completed in the second brightness data table, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 is started during the first display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 is continued during the second display period. However, the control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the third display period, and in the third brightness data table, the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the third display period.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group preview luminance data table according to modification)
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a group preview luminance data table according to a modification. Note that each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is expressed in hexadecimal numbers. “0” is data corresponding to turning off the light, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Among "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-intensity lighting, respectively, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-intensity lighting, respectively. Note that when the concept of low brightness includes turning off the light, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), in the grandchild table W101, RGB data is defined for each lamp at equal intervals of 20 msec from T101-1 to T101-10, and furthermore, at the last time T101-11. 10 minutes (600,000 msec) of data is specified for troubleshooting.

As shown in FIG. 86(b), in the grandchild table W102, RGB data is defined for each lamp over T102-1 to T102-10 at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec. W102 includes brightness data that causes one frame lamp to be lit at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp to be lit at high brightness, and lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit at high brightness. The brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes. For example, in W102, sparse high-brightness data (for example, "A") is defined so that the light is lit at high brightness across multiple locations. As a result, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps are sparsely lit at high brightness in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in a group in the group preview performance. Further, W102 is designed to light more frame lamps at higher brightness than W101.

As shown in FIG. 86(c), in the grandchild table W103, RGB data is defined for the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp from T103-1 to T103-6 at intervals of 14 msec. After that, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp at short intervals of 2 msec from T103-7 to T103-38, and for the frame right lamp, it is continued at long intervals of 14 msec from T103-7 to T103-38. RGB data is specified.

In addition, in W103, from T103-2 to T103-30, the lamps that were lit at high brightness from around the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are turned off gradually or turned off at low brightness in stages. Or increase the number of lamps that turn on at low brightness. Regarding T103-7 to T103-38, brightness data is specified at 14 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, whereas the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group preview. ~9L12, the brightness data is defined so that the brightness changes from high brightness to off or to low brightness at short intervals of 2 msec. Thereby, in accordance with the performance in which the characters disappear to the left end of the screen in the group notice, the position where the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness is changed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko game machine 1.

Further, in W103, the brightness data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low brightness at the time of transition from T103-30. Furthermore, in W103, similarly to W101, brightness data for troubleshooting is defined for the last 10 minutes (600000 ms) (T103-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when moving to the next performance.

[Production mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 172, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be explained. In this embodiment, a presentation mode will be described when any of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 in which pseudo variation is performed twice is selected. Further, in the figure, hatching indicates how each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks.

(Production mode at stage A)
With reference to FIGS. 87 to 109, the production mode in stage A will be described.

As shown in FIG. 87(a1), when variable display starts based on one pending memory, decorative symbols are variably displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of image display device 5, and The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and furthermore, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Maid A (Yume-chan) flying as a character appearing in Stage A is displayed. Note that during variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and effect sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 87(a2), when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the characters "x2" indicating that the second variable display is performed are displayed, as shown in FIG. 87(a3), , a second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a4), when the pseudo continuous effect is further performed and the characters "x3" are displayed indicating that the third variable display will be performed, as shown in FIG. 88 (a5). Then, the third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (a6), when "3" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and "3" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the variable display mode changes to reach. It becomes a mode.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a7), a decorative pattern for the reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 89 (a8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 69 to 75. In the state shown in FIG. 89(a8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit at high brightness. Note that during the reach line performance, performance sounds corresponding to the reach line performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 89(a9), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen begins to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes larger.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a10), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and a reach line appears at the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (ray) that connects the left and right decorative symbols that make up the reach mode, and is colored with a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become or will become the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a11), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 90 (a12), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 90, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a13), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line at the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91 (a14), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91 (a15), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a16), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen now gradually shrinks in stages, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 92 (b17), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further shrinks, and the reach line at the center of the screen further shrinks in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (a18), the reach line at the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 92 (a18), if a six-person group preview is executed, the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 93 (a19), and if a background preview is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 102 The process moves to the effect shown in (a101), and if the lamp notice is to be executed, the process moves to the effect shown in FIG. 103 (a111).

As mentioned above, the six-person group preview is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and six characters dressed as maids appear in a group. The performance progresses as follows. A background preview is an effect that suggests that the display result of a variable display of a special figure or decorative figure will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and a specific character (for example, a main character, a rare character, etc.) This is an effect that is displayed together with a background (for example, a starry sky background). The lamp notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special figure or decorative figure will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and is a performance that indicates that the display result of the variable display of the special figure or decorative figure will be a predetermined jackpot symbol, and is a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the accessory lamp 9A, etc.). It is a performance that lights up or flashes. In the lamp notice, any one lamp or plural lamps among the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinking, or lamps provided other than the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked. You may blink.

In stage A, a group preview (for example, a six-person group preview or a Boingo group preview) is executed after the reach line performance of the previous change. For example, when the six-person group preview is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 93 (a19). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 84. For example, during the PUSH performance, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K light up or blink. Note that during the PUSH performance, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. In this manner, in the PUSH effect, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by using a sound.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a20), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! An effect occurs where the text image of “!” disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that he or she has effectively pressed the push button 31B during the PUSH performance. Note that the output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends before the group preview performance (in this example, a six-person group preview) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all frame lamps are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a21), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to displaying the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a22), the six-person group preview starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a23), in the first display period, the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), appears as the first (first) character. Note that the state shown in FIG. 94 (a23) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. This shows a first situation in which a part (part of the face in this example) is displayed.

During execution of the six-person group preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the group preview performance based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 62 to 68. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 94 to 96, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the parts where the characters appear in the group preview begin to light up with high brightness, and then At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up at high brightness will move. In addition, the scene where the group preview performance (six-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, Boingo preview described below) was performed, images other than those related to the group preview performance (for example, background images, images related to the first half of SP Reach preview, etc.) ), the brightness is reduced. The brightness of the other images, which has decreased during the group preview presentation, gradually returns to the original brightness in stages during the third display period. On the other hand, the fourth symbol 5J and small symbol 5M indicating the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number, the first pending memory display area 5D, the second pending memory display area 5U, the active display area 5A, etc. The display of information related to games with high importance in terms of wins and losses and advantages of games is given a high priority so that the brightness will not be lowered even if a group preview effect is executed.

During the group preview performance, performance sounds corresponding to the group preview performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Regarding the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, as shown in FIG. 59, output of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, The volume of the effect sound is increased to a specific volume during the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is lowered during the third display period. Note that when the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, in addition to the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the second character appears. By this time, the output of the start sound has stopped.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a24), the second character appears shortly after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in FIG. 94 (a24) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. Although the whole of Maid B (Jam-chan), who was displayed more than in the first situation and was displayed second, was not displayed yet, a part of Maid B (part of her face in this example) was displayed. It represents the second situation.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a25), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. As shown in FIG. 95 (a26), an animation is displayed in which the second character to appear overtakes the first character to appear. As shown in FIG. 95 (a27), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a28), the characters continue to advance, and eventually the second character that appears running at the top (first) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 96 (a29), the second character running at the top (leading position) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 96 (a30), the character running at the top and appearing second is the first to disappear from the left end of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a31), in the second display period, an animation in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the frame lamps are sparsely lit at high brightness in accordance with the characters advancing in groups in the group preview effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks in accordance with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through the screen. In addition, the effect sound corresponding to the group preview outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, the sound of footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 97(a32) to 98(a36), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a37), in the third display period, the last character appears and an animation is displayed in which the last character appears and runs along with other characters from the left side of the screen to the right side. Note that no new character appears in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, in accordance with the effect in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview, the frame lamps are also turned off or dimmed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The position of the light will change depending on the brightness. In addition, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37), when entering the third display period, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a38), as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the frame lamp begins to go out. In the example shown in FIG. 99 (a38), since no character is displayed in the right half of the screen, part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 99 (a39), as the character further disappears to the left end of the screen, the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases.

As shown in FIGS. 100 (a40) and (a41), as the characters gradually disappear in stages, the number of game effect lamps 9 that go out increases. As shown in FIG. 100 (a42), when the last character disappears, the group preview effect ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 101, a comparative example of a six-person group preview will be compared with a six-person group preview according to the present embodiment. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 101 (a201), similarly to the present embodiment shown in FIG. This is the first situation in which a part of the face (in this example, part of the face) is displayed.

After that, in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 94 (a24), while the whole of the maid A that was initially displayed is not displayed yet, a part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and In contrast to the second situation in which the entirety of the maid B (Jam-chan) displayed is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) is displayed. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 101 (a202), the second maid B does not appear, the maid A continues to run, and the entire maid A is displayed. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 101 (a203), the second maid B appears only after the first maid A has run to the left of the center of the screen. In such a comparative example, only one character appears, and it does not appear to be a group preview presentation.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 100, an animation in which multiple characters appear and run one after another without any gaps is displayed, so multiple characters advance as a group. By doing so, it is possible to create a powerful performance. Further, since the number of characters that overtake other characters is smaller than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character, it is possible to prevent the group preview performance from becoming too complicated. Note that the number of characters that overtake other characters may be greater than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character. In this case, a lively group preview performance can be shown to the player.

When the background preview is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 102 (a101). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 84.

As shown in FIG. 102 (a102), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” character image disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all frame lamps are lit at high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (a103), as a background preview, a specific character (in this example, Maid B (Jam-chan)) is displayed on an image display device with a specific background (in this example, a starry sky background). 5 is displayed on the screen. Furthermore, during the performance of the background preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance of the background preview based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background preview.

When the lamp preview is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 103 (a111). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 84.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a112), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH performance, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” character image disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all frame lamps are lit at high brightness.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (a113), a lamp preview is executed, and a predetermined lamp (for example, accessory lamp 9A, etc.) included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks. Incidentally, effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the lamp preview.

After the third display period of the group notice ends as shown in FIG. 100 (a42), or after the background notice shown in FIG. 102 (a103) or the lamp notice shown in FIG. 103 (a113) ends, As shown in FIG. 108, a symbol feeding effect is executed. The symbol feeding effect determines whether or not the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed (in this embodiment, the ornamental symbol in the middle ornamental symbol display area 5C) stops in the ornamental symbol that is in the reach mode, and the ornament that stops. This is a performance that prompts the player to decide whether or not the symbol is a decorative symbol constituting a jackpot symbol. During the symbol feeding performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding performance based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding effect.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a43), when the symbol feeding effect starts, the variable displaying decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) to start variable display. At this time, the symbol feeding performance starts from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in the reach mode (i.e., the ornamental symbol that constitutes the jackpot), but the starting position is a lower position away from the decorative pattern in the reach mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 104 (a44) to 105 (a48), the decorative pattern in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 106(a49) to 107(a54), as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, the speed of variable display of the decorative pattern increases, and as shown in FIGS. 108(a55) to 107(a57), As shown, the central decorative pattern is finally variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, faster than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 108 (a57), when the decorative pattern approximately in the middle is variably displayed over two rounds, the pattern feeding effect ends.

After the symbol feeding effect has been completed, as shown in FIGS. 109 (a58) and (a59), an effect called whiteout is applied to the image including the character image and the "3" decorative pattern in reach mode. The color gradually becomes white, and finally the image including the character image and the decorative pattern of "3" in the ready-to-reach mode becomes completely invisible. After that, as shown in Figure 109 (a59), when the transparency of the entire front screen, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for the change that was switched on the back side changes to the screen. appear above.

(Production mode in the first half of SP reach)
With reference to FIGS. 110 to 118, the production mode in the first half of SP reach will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 110 (a61) and (a62), after shifting to the post-variation, the character animation is displayed until the title image of SP Reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or may be a character that appears in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 110 (a63), the title of SP Reach is displayed. In this embodiment, as an SP reach performance, a maid character such as Yumu-chan catches Bakushu, so the title "Catch Bakushu!" is displayed. During the performance of the first half of SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach, based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that performance sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 111 (c1), when the first half of the SP reach is performed, an image of Maid A (Yume-chan) standing in a dignified position is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 111(c2), an image in which Bakuchu, the opponent's character (enemy character), is surprised is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 111(c3) to 112(c5), an animation is displayed in which Maid A chases the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in Figure 112 (c6), after an animation in which Maid A pounces on Bakuchu is displayed, if there is a loss (in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 9), the effect shifts to the effect shown in Figure 113 (c11). However, when there is a jackpot (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 20), it shifts to the production shown in Figure 115 (c21), and when it moves to the second half of SP reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation numbers 12 and 23), or When moving to the final reach (in the case of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 15 and 26), the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c31).

If the loss is confirmed in the first half of SP reach, after the performance shown in FIG. 112 (c6), the process shifts to the performance shown in FIG. 113 (c11). In the production shown in FIG. 113 (c11), an image of Maid A depressed because she was unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing symbol "4" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. ” stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (c12), due to a production effect called blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" that were in a losing state is changed. It gradually becomes black, and as shown in Figure 113 (c13), eventually the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which have become lose modes, become completely invisible. .

After that, as shown in Figures 114 (c14) and (c15), when the transparency of the entire front screen that has become black due to blackout is gradually increased, the normal background that was switched on the back side A staged image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (c16), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the loss is confirmed.

When a jackpot is confirmed in the first half of SP reach, after the performance shown in FIG. 112 (c6), the process shifts to the performance shown in FIG. 115 (c21). In the production shown in FIG. 115 (c21), an image of Maid A catching Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and a jackpot symbol "" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. 3" stops.

After that, a fanfare performance will be performed. In the fanfare performance, as shown in Figure 115 (c22), the decorative pattern consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in Figure 115 (c23). , the decorative designs are displayed so as to protrude from the top of the screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 116(c24) and (c25), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (c26), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the jackpot is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 117 (c27) to (c29), the face image of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the words "FEVER!" are displayed is displayed.

When moving to the second half of SP reach or the final reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 112 (c6), the effect moves to the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c31). In the production shown in FIG. 118 (c31), an image of Maid A depressed because she could not catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing symbol "4" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. ” stops. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (c32), due to blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" that are lost is gradually blackened. Up to this point, the effect is the same as when the player loses in the first half of the SP reach shown in FIGS. 113 (c11) and (c12). However, as shown in FIG. 118 (c33), when moving to the second half of SP reach or the final reach, an effect is performed in which the movable body 32 falls, which did not occur when the player lost in the first half of SP reach.

After the effect of the movable body 32 falling is executed, when moving to the latter half of SP reach (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation numbers 12 and 23), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 119 (c41), and the final When shifting to reach (in the case of variation patterns of main variation numbers 15 and 26), the production shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 126 (c71). In this way, among the fluctuation patterns that result in a jackpot, there are fluctuation patterns that pretend that the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, and then shift to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach. As a result, from the player's perspective, once he thinks that he will lose in the first half of the SP reach, he will be able to move to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach by relief, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Production mode in the second half of SP reach)
With reference to FIGS. 119 to 125, the production mode in the second half of SP reach will be explained.

When moving to the second half of the SP reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c33), the effect moves to the effect shown in FIG. 119 (c41). In the effect shown in FIG. 119 (c41), character images, background images, etc. become completely invisible.

After that, as shown in Figure 119 (c42), when the transparency of the entire front screen, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the effect image of the second half of SP Reach, which had been switched on the back side, appears. It becomes visible. During the performance of the second half of SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the second half of SP reach, based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the second half of SP reach.

As shown in Figure 119 (c42), when the second half of SP Reach is performed, Maid A (Yumemu-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan) stand up and declare war against Bakuchu. The image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c43) to 120 (c45), an animation is displayed in which Maid A and Maid B chase Bakuchu as he runs away.

As shown in Figure 119 (c46), after an animation in which Maid A and Maid B jump at Bakuchu is displayed, the case of losing (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 12) is shown in Figure 121 (c51). When the game moves to the production, and when there is a jackpot (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 23), it shifts to the production shown in Figure 123 (c61), and when it moves to the final reach (in the case of the variation pattern of main variation numbers 15 and 26) The process moves to the effect shown in FIG. 126 (c71).

If the loss is confirmed in the latter half of SP reach, after the performance shown in Fig. 120 (c46), the process shifts to the performance shown in Fig. 123 (c51). In the production shown in FIG. 123 (c51), an image of Maid A and Maid B depressed because they were unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing pattern is displayed as a decorative pattern located in the central decorative pattern display area 5C. A certain "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (c52), due to blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which have become lose modes, becomes black in stages, As shown in FIG. 121 (c53), eventually the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which are in the losing mode, become completely invisible.

After that, as shown in Figures 122 (c54) and (c55), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the transparency for the normal background that had been switched on the back side A staged image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (c56), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the loss is confirmed.

If the jackpot is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, after the performance shown in Figure 120 (c46), the process shifts to the performance shown in Figure 123 (c61). In the performance shown in FIG. 123 (c61), an image of Maid A and Maid B catching Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and a jackpot symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. "3" stops.

After that, a fanfare performance will be performed. In the fanfare performance, as shown in Figure 123 (c62), the decorative pattern consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, as shown in Figure 123 (c63). , the decorative designs are displayed so as to protrude from the top of the screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 124 (c64) and (c65), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (c66), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the jackpot is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 125 (c67) to (c69), the face image of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the words "FEVER!" are displayed is displayed.

(Production mode at final reach)
With reference to FIGS. 126 to 136, the performance mode in the final reach will be described.

When moving to the final reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 120 (c46), the process moves to the effect shown in FIG. 126 (c71). When moving to the final reach, the entire screen suddenly turns black, as shown in Figure 126 (c71), and a cross-shaped light effect appears in the center of the screen, as shown in Figure 126 (c72). be done. After that, as shown in Figure 126 (c73), a production is executed to notify the start of the final reach, and the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan) is displayed on the entire screen, along with the message "Let's go!" ” is displayed. Note that the light effect display as shown in FIG. 126 (c72) is a combination of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 126 (c71) and the effect in which the main character's face image is displayed as shown in FIG. 126 (c73). It is deliberately inserted in between. Thereby, by the effect shown in FIG. 126 (c72), it is possible to more easily convey to the player that the final reach will be reached.

After that, the performance during the final reach will be executed. During the second half of the final reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the second half of the final reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach.

As shown in FIG. 127 (c74), an image of maid A giving a peace sign is displayed. After that, as shown in Figures 127 (c75) to 127 (c78), an image of one character is displayed at multiple timings, and as shown in Figure 127 (c79), an image of the entire sentence is displayed. This indicates the theme of the performance that will be executed at the final reach. In this example, "all members gather" is indicated.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 129 (c80) to 130 (c85), animations introducing characters appearing in the final reach performance are displayed at multiple timings. For example, in this example, supporting characters appear in order, such as Maid F, Maid E, Maid D, Maid C, Maid B, Maid A, etc., and near the end (or in the second half), characters with high priority such as the main character appear. A character appears. Note that characters with a high priority such as the main character may appear in order. That is, it is preferable that a character with a high priority such as the main character appear at the beginning (or the first half) or near the end (or the second half) so that it stands out more than a character with a low priority such as a supporting character.

After that, as shown in Figure 131 (c86), when the final reach effect is executed, an image of the six characters that appeared in the six-person group preview standing up and declaring war against Bakuchu is displayed. be done. After that, as shown in FIGS. 131 (c87) to 132 (c89), an animation is displayed in which six characters chase the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 132 (c90), after an animation in which six characters chase a blowjob is displayed, a trigger effect is executed as shown in FIG. 132 (c91). When the trigger effect is executed, an image showing the stick controller 31A and a meter image showing the time limit in which the stick controller 31A can be operated are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the words "Close!!" are displayed. The image is displayed.

After the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 132 (c91), in the event of a loss (in the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 15), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 133 (c101), and in the event of a jackpot (In the case of the variation pattern with main variation number 26), the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 134 (c111).

If a loss is confirmed in the final reach, after the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger performance shown in FIG. 132 (c91), the performance shifts to the performance shown in FIG. 133 (c101). In the production shown in FIG. 133 (c101), an image of six characters depressed because they were unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and a losing symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (c102), due to blackout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3", which have become lose modes, becomes black in stages, As shown in FIG. 133 (c103), eventually the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" that have become lose modes become completely invisible.

After that, although not shown, if you gradually increase the transparency of the entire front screen that has become black due to blackout, the normal background effect image that was switched on the back side will appear. Become. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the loss is confirmed.

When a jackpot is confirmed in the final reach, after the effect shown in FIG. 132 (c91), the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 134 (c111). In the production shown in FIG. 134 (c111), an image of six characters catching Bakuchu is displayed, and a jackpot symbol "3" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. Stop.

After that, a fanfare performance will be performed. In the fanfare performance, as shown in Figure 134 (c112), the decorative pattern consisting of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in Figure 134 (c113). , the decorative designs are displayed so as to protrude from the top of the screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 135 (c114) and (c115), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (c116), the variable display of the decorative symbols is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbols 5M is also completely stopped, and the jackpot is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 136 (c117) to (c119), the face image of the main character, maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the words "FEVER!" are displayed is displayed.

(Production mode at stage B)
With reference to FIGS. 137 to 157, the production mode in stage B will be described.

As shown in FIG. 137(b1), when the variable display starts based on one pending memory, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5, and The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and furthermore, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Bakuchu is displayed as a character appearing in stage B. Note that during variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and effect sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 137 (b2), when the pseudo continuous effect is performed and the characters "x2" indicating that the second variable display is performed, as shown in FIG. 137 (b3), , a second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 137 (b4), when the pseudo continuous effect is further performed and the characters "x3" are displayed indicating that the third variable display will be performed, as shown in FIG. 138 (b5). Then, the third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (b6), when "3" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and "3" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the variable display mode changes to reach. It becomes a mode.

As shown in FIG. 139 (b7), a decorative pattern for a reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 139 (b8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 69 to 75. Note that the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 69 to 75 are the same as the brightness data tables used in the stage A reach line performance. In the state shown in FIG. 139(b8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. Note that during the reach line performance, performance sounds corresponding to the reach line performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 139(b9), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen begins to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes larger.

As shown in FIG. 140 (b10), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and a reach line appears at the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (ray) that connects the left and right decorative symbols that make up the reach mode, and is colored with a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become or will become the reach mode. Note that the reach line that appears in stage B may be the same as the reach line that appears in stage A, or may be different in color, shape, size, etc., for example.

As shown in FIG. 140 (b11), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 140 (b12), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 140, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b13), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line at the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 141 (b14), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 141 (b15), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further expands, and the reach line at the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 141, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b16), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen gradually shrinks step by step, and the reach line at the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 142 (b17), the decorative pattern at the center of the screen further shrinks, and the reach line at the center of the screen further shrinks in the left-right direction (inward) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (b18), the reach line at the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 142 (b18), the symbol feed effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 143 to 147. During the symbol feeding performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding performance based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol feeding effect.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b19), when the symbol feeding effect starts, the variable displaying decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed) is displayed. ) to start variable display. At this time, the symbol feeding performance starts from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in the reach mode (i.e., the ornamental symbol that constitutes the jackpot), but the starting position is a lower position away from the decorative pattern in the reach mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 143 (b20) to 144 (b24), the decorative pattern in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). After that, as shown in FIG. 145 (b25) to FIG. 146 (b30), as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, the speed of variable display of the decorative pattern increases, and as shown in FIG. 147 (b31) to (b33). As shown, the central decorative pattern is finally variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, faster than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 147 (b33), when the decorative pattern approximately in the middle is variably displayed over two rounds, the pattern feeding effect ends.

After the symbol feeding effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 148 (b34) and (b35), due to whiteout, the color of the image including the character image and the decorative symbol "3" in the ready-to-reach mode is gradually whitened. Eventually, the image including the character image and the decorative pattern of "3" in the ready-to-reach mode disappears completely. After that, as shown in Figure 148 (b36), when the transparency of the entire front screen, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for the change that was switched on the back side changes to the screen. appear above.

As shown in FIGS. 149 (b37) and (b38), after shifting to the post-variation, the character animation is displayed until the title image of SP Reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or may be a character that appears in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 149 (b39), the title of SP Reach ("Catch the Bakuchu!") is displayed. During the performance of the first half of SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach, based on a predetermined brightness data table. Note that performance sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of SP reach.

In stage B, a group preview (for example, a Bakuchu preview or a Boingo group preview) is executed during a period when the title of the first half of the SP reach of the post-change is being displayed. For example, when the Bakuchu group preview is executed during the period when the title of the first half of SP reach is being displayed, a PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 150 (b40). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for pressing the button are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image "PUSH!!" is displayed. be done. Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 84. For example, during the PUSH performance, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K light up or blink. Note that during the PUSH performance, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. In this manner, in the PUSH effect, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by using a sound.

As shown in FIG. 150 (b41), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH performance, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and "PUSH! !” character image disappears. Furthermore, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that he or she has effectively pressed the push button 31B during the PUSH performance. Note that the output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends before the group preview performance (in this example, the Bakuchu group preview) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all frame lamps are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 150 (b42), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to displaying the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 151 (b43), the Bakuchu group preview starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 151 (b44), the first (first) character appears in the first display period. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 151 (b44), while the entirety of the first (first) character is not yet displayed, a part of the first character (in this example, part of the face) is not displayed. ) is displayed, representing the first situation.

During execution of the Bakuchu group preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the group preview effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 62 to 68. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 151 to 153, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the parts where the characters appear in the group preview begin to light with high brightness, and then At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up at high brightness will move.

During the group preview performance, performance sounds corresponding to the group preview performance are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Regarding the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, as shown in FIG. 59, output of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, The volume of the effect sound is increased to a specific volume during the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is lowered during the third display period. Note that when the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, in addition to the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the second character appears. By this time, the output of the start sound has stopped.

As shown in FIG. 151 (b45), the second character appears soon after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in FIG. 151 (b45) is such that while the entire first character is not yet displayed, a part of the first character is displayed more than in the first situation, and the second This represents a second situation in which a part of the second character (in this example, a part of the face) is displayed while the entire character displayed in the second position is not yet displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 152 (b46) to (b48), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. Note that the display area on the screen used in the group preview performance is larger than the display area of "Catch the Bakuchu!" in the SP first half title preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 153 (b49), the characters continue to advance, and eventually the first character displayed running at the top reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 153 (b50), the first character displayed running at the top (leading position) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 153 (b51), the first character displayed running at the top disappears from the left end of the screen first. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 154 (b52), in the second display period, an animation in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the frame lamps are sparsely lit at high brightness in accordance with the characters advancing in a group in the group preview effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks in accordance with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through the screen. In addition, the effect sound corresponding to the group preview outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, the sound of footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (b52) to FIG. 155 (b57), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

When the characters run in a group from the left side of the screen to the right side, the characters cover the entire screen, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see the title display of ``Catch the Bakuchu!'' .

As shown in FIG. 156 (b58), in the third display period, an animation in which the last character appears and runs from the left side to the right side of the screen together with other characters is displayed. Note that no new character appears in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the frame lamps are also turned off or dimmed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview. The position of the light will change depending on the brightness. Note that, as shown in FIG. 156 (b58), when the third display period begins, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 156 (b59), as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the frame lamp begins to go out. In the example shown in FIG. 156 (b59), since no character is displayed in the right half of the screen, part of the right frame lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 156 (b60), as the character further disappears to the left end of the screen, the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases.

As shown in FIG. 156, as the character disappears to the left end of the screen, the title display of ``Catch Bakuchu!'' gradually reappears in stages. At this time, if you have won the SP first half title preview lottery, the SP first half title preview will be performed by changing the display format (for example, color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the title display of "Catch the Bakuchu!" . For example, as shown in Figure 149 (b39), before the Bakuchu group preview is executed, the text "Catch the Bakchu!" in the title display in the first half of SP Reach is white, but as shown in Figure 155 (b56) As shown in , when the character image in the group preview is subsequently displayed on the layer in front of the layer where the title is being displayed, the title display becomes difficult to see or becomes invisible. While the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview, the text "Catch Bakuchu!" in the title display switches to red, and as shown in Figures 156 (b59) and (b60), the characters in the group preview disappears to the left edge of the screen, and the red title display gradually appears and becomes visible.

As shown in FIGS. 157 (b61) and (b62), as the characters gradually disappear in stages, the number of game effect lamps 9 that go out increases. As shown in FIG. 157 (b63), when the last character disappears, the group preview effect ends. Thereafter, the process shifts to the first half of SP reach shown in FIG. 111(c1).

(Boingo group preview)
With reference to FIGS. 158 to 167, the presentation mode of the Boingo group preview will be described.

In the six-person group preview and Bakuchu group preview described above, a plurality of characters advance as a group from the right edge of the screen toward the left edge. In this way, the six-person group preview and the Bakuchu group preview were effects in which the characters progressed in the X-axis direction on the XY plane shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the Boingo group preview, the character (Boingo) can also move in the Z-axis direction of the screen. That is, the Boingo group preview is a 3D performance in which characters advance in a three-dimensional space of XYZ.

FIGS. 158 to 163 are diagrams for explaining the production mode when the Boingo group preview is executed in stage A. Note that even when the Boingo group is executed in stage B, the performance mode is the same as that shown in FIGS. 158 to 163. Although not shown, the Boingo group preview performance also includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period, similar to the six-person group preview performance and the Bakuchu group preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 158 (d1), the Boingo group preview starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group preview performance will be executed from now on.

During execution of the Boingo group preview, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the group preview performance, based on the brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 62 to 68, for example. For example, in the group preview, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the locations where the characters appear begin to light up with high brightness, and then the locations of the lamps that light up with high brightness move in accordance with the direction in which the characters advance. In addition, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps are sparsely lit at high brightness in accordance with the appearance of characters advancing in groups. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks in accordance with the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through the screen. In addition, the effect sound corresponding to the group preview outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, the sound of footsteps in accordance with the animation display of characters running.

As shown in FIG. 158(d2), a preceding image with a light effect is displayed as a preliminary effect before the character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen. The specific position is a group appearance point where the character group appears. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158(d3), the first character appears from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the previous image due to the light effect.

After that, as shown in Figures 159 (d4) and (d5), the second and third characters appear, and an animation is displayed in which each character gradually moves towards the screen. be done. As shown in FIG. 159 (d6), as the initially displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible due to the first character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 160 (d7) to (d9), the characters form a group and advance from the depth side of the screen toward the front side, so that the characters cover the entire screen. As shown in FIGS. 161 (d10) to (d12), the last character appears and advances from the depth side to the front side of the screen.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 162 (d13) and (d14), as the last character progresses from the depth side of the screen toward the front side, it comes to cover most of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (d15), the last character is enlarged and displayed from one end of the screen to the other end, and the last character covers the entire screen.

After that, as shown in Figures 163 (d16) and (d17), as the last character disappears from the screen, the original background image is displayed, and as shown in Figure 153 (d18), when the last character disappears, the original background image is displayed. The group preview performance ends.

FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining details of the Boingo group notice. 164(A) to (F) correspond to FIGS. 158(d3) to 159(d6), and FIGS. 160(d8) and (d9), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 164(A), the first character appears from the group appearance point, and as shown in FIGS. 164(B) to (F), characters appear one after another from the group appearance point. Here, as the initially displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible due to the first character. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 164(E) and (F), even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it cannot be seen, so the subsequent character image must not be placed. Good too.

Here, a comparative example of the Boingo group notice and the Boingo group notice according to this embodiment will be compared with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 165, a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position (group appearance point) on the screen, but the preceding image due to the light effect as shown in FIG. 158 (d2) is not displayed. Therefore, in order to eliminate the strange feeling of a character suddenly appearing large, it is necessary to create an animation in which the character is displayed small and then gradually enlarged, as shown in Figures 165 and 166. .

Therefore, in the comparative example, the animation display as shown in FIG. 165 (d101) to FIG. 166 (d105) is performed until the character can be displayed in the size shown in FIG. 158 (d3) as shown in FIG. 166 (d106). This requires additional production time, and images for animation must also be created. On the other hand, in the case of the picture form of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 158(d2) and (d3), a preliminary image with a light effect is displayed as a preliminary effect before the character appears, so this light By displaying the first character from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the display of the previous image due to the effect, it is possible to display the character from the beginning at a certain size (the size shown in Figure 158 (d3) and Figure 166 (d106)). It can be displayed.

(Variation example of Boingo group notice)
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when a boingo group notice according to a modified example is executed. The example shown in FIG. 167 may be replaced with the example shown in FIG. 163. For example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (d101) to (d103), the title image of the first half of the SP may be displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 158 (d1), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview on the layer in front of the layer in which the normal background image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 167 (d103) , the normal background image may be switched to the title image of the first half of the SP. In this way, the group preview performance may be executed while the preview performance, such as the SP first half title preview performance, is being executed.

Further, the title image in the first half of the SP in the Boingo group preview may be changed in display mode as shown in FIG. 157 to foretell a jackpot. Furthermore, instead of enlarging the last character to cover the entire screen, the next effect may be switched to using an animation in which the background image used for the group preview effect is rolled up like a scroll.

(dog group notice)
With reference to FIGS. 168 to 170, the presentation mode of the dog group notice will be explained.

In this embodiment, a six-person group preview, a Bakuchu preview, and a Boingo group preview are illustrated as group preview performances, but the pachinko game machine 1 is also known as a dog group preview as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170. It may also be possible to execute a group preview effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 168(e1), the first character is displayed, then multiple dog characters appear one after another as shown in FIG. 168(e2), and then as shown in FIG. 168(e3). The screen area may be covered by a group of characters as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 169 (e4) to (e6), as the last displayed character disappears, the title image of the first half of the SP is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (e3), while the entire screen is covered by the character images in the group preview performance on the layer in front of the layer in which the normal background image is displayed, the screen shown in FIG. 169 (e6) , the normal background image is switched to the title image of the first half of the SP. Then, on the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, a title image of the first half of the SP corresponding to the performance of the first half of the SP reach is displayed.

Further, the title image in the first half of the SP in the dog group preview may be changed in display mode as shown in FIG. 157 to foretell a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 170, when comparing the six-person group notice and the dog group notice, the distance between the first character displayed in the dog group notice and the last character displayed (the length between them on the (b) X2 is shorter than the distance (the length between them on the X axis) X1 between the first character displayed and the last character displayed in the six-person group preview. Further, since the execution times are the same or substantially the same for both, the speed V2 at which the character advances in the dog group preview is slower than the speed V1 at which the character advances in the six person group preview. Further, the density D2 of the plurality of characters in the dog group preview is larger than the density D1 of the plurality of characters in the six person group preview. In addition, the dog group preview performance has a higher expectation level (reliability) of a jackpot than the six-person group preview performance, and the dog group preview performance has a lower appearance rate (execution probability) than the six-person group preview performance.

(Execution of group preview performance during reach line performance)
With reference to FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, an explanation will be given of an effect mode when a group preview effect is executed during the reach line.

As shown in FIG. 171 (f1), in a state where the reach line effect is executed, the group preview effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 171 (f2) to (f4), and then, in the state shown in FIGS. ), a symbol feeding effect may be executed.

[Main composition and effects]
Below, technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be individually listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Crowd preview performance) and
Blessing effect execution means for executing a congratulatory effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that displays an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display has become the specific display result (for example, a process for executing a fanfare effect by the effect control CPU 120) ) and,
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
The blessing performance can be performed after the group performance (for example, the fanfare performance shown in FIGS. 115 to 117 is performed after the six-person group preview performance shown in FIGS. 94 to 100 is performed),
If it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result that is different from the specific display result (for example, in the case of a variation pattern of variation number 9), and the variable display is In the first predetermined period (for example, the period T1+T2 shown in FIG. 60) until the display suggests that the display is a losing display result, the first display period starts in the latter half of the first predetermined period. (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61),
In cases where it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variation pattern of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), the variable display has not changed since the start of the variable display. In the second predetermined period (for example, T3+T4 period, T5+T6 period, T7+T8 period) until the specific display result is suggested, the first display period is the first half of the second predetermined period. starts (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 60 and 61).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, the feeling of elation may fade over time until the result of the variable display is finalized, but if the result of the variable display is a fluctuating pattern that results in a losing display, in the latter half of the time of the variable display. By executing the group preview performance, the feeling of elation can be sustained or revived. On the other hand, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a winning display result, a fanfare performance that is a blessing performance is performed, so the group preview performance is performed in the first half of the variable display time to create a feeling of elation. , Even if the feeling of elation fades over time, it can be sustained or rekindled through a blessing performance.

The "specific display result" is a display result that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. That is, even if the specific display result is derived, it is a display result for controlling the gaming state to be advantageous. In this embodiment, a jackpot occurs when the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the lighting corresponding to the jackpot occurs. A combination of aspects results in a specific display result. In addition, a jackpot occurs when the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the jackpot is specified. The result will be displayed. Furthermore, the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 may be a specific special pattern (for example, a jackpot such as "3, 3, 3" or "7, 7, 7"). A jackpot occurs when the machine stops with a symbol combination), and the display of the specific special symbol becomes the specific display result.

The "losing display result" is a display result that is different from the specific display result, and is a display result that is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the losing display result. That is, the losing display result is a display result in which the gaming state is not controlled to be advantageous even if it is derived. In this embodiment, when the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss, the result of the game becomes a loss; A combination of corresponding lighting modes becomes a losing display result. In addition, when the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the lighting mode corresponding to the loss. The combination will result in a loss display. Furthermore, the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 become a specific predetermined pattern (for example, a losing pattern combination such as "3, 2, 3") and stop. Sometimes, the result of the game is a loss, and the display of the predetermined symbol becomes a loss display result.

The "advantageous state" is a state advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state in which the gaming value imparting rate (for example, the payout rate of game balls) is 1 or more or more than 1 by being controlled. In this embodiment, a jackpot game state that is controlled when each of normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 9 occur is exemplified as an advantageous state. The advantageous state may be a small winning game state that is controlled when a small winning occurs, or may be a variable probability state or a time saving state.

The "new display of a character" may be the same type of character as the character first displayed in the group preview presentation, or may be a different type of character from the character first displayed in the group preview presentation. good.

"Blessing performance" is a performance that displays an image that congratulates the variable display result having become a specific display result, and is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the variable display display result becoming a specific display result. It is also a performance that displays images that celebrate things. "Congratulate" includes suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or that it will be controlled in an advantageous state. In addition, "bless" improves the player's expectations for an advantageous state by suggesting or informing that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result, or that it will be controlled to an advantageous state. This includes causing someone to do something. For example, the blessing effect is that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and that the special figure 2 variable display section of the special figure LED board 9020 The combination of lighting modes in 9022 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, or the decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 are a specific special symbol ( This includes displaying an image that suggests or informs the player that a jackpot symbol has been reached or that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

"The blessing performance can be performed after the group performance" means that the group preview performance is executed within the variable display based on the 1 pending memory, and then the blessing performance is executed within the variable display based on the 1 pending memory. Including that the performance is executed. In addition, "the blessing performance can be executed after the group performance" means that the display result of the variable display based on the first pending memory is a specific display result. When a group preview effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that suggests or foretells the display result before the display result starts, the group preview effect is executed, and then the variable display based on the suspended memory of the 1 is started and the 1 is displayed. This includes executing a blessing effect within the variable display based on the reserved memory.

The "first predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, and in this embodiment, FIGS. 60 and 61 This is exemplified by the period T1+T2 shown in FIG. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a loss display result" means that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss. , that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 corresponds to a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and that the combination of lighting modes corresponds to a loss; and the decorative pattern display area of the image display device 5. This includes that the decorative symbols variably displayed in 5L, 5C, and 5R become a specific predetermined symbol (losing symbol combination) and then stop. Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a loss display result, the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a win display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result" indicates to the player that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result due to the movable body 32 not operating at a specific timing, or Including informing. Note that the specific timing is the timing at which an effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, is performed, and when the player operates the operating means, the movable body 32 operates when the player wins the jackpot. You can.

The "second predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and in this embodiment, This is exemplified by the period T3+T4, the period T5+T6, and the period T7+T8 shown in FIG. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" means that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display section 9021 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot. , that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display section 9022 of the special figure LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and that the display is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. This includes that the decorative pattern that is being played becomes a specific special pattern (jackpot pattern combination) and stops. Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a loss display result, the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a win display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" means that the movement of the movable body 32 at a specific timing suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, or Including informing. Note that the specific timing is the timing at which an effect that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, is performed, and when the player operates the operating means, the movable body 32 operates when the player wins the jackpot. You can.

(1-2) The second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period, and the third display period is longer than the first display period. (For example, each display period shown in FIG. 59).

From this, by making the second display period in which characters appear one after another in the group preview presentation the longest period, it is possible to make the group preview presentation more powerful. Furthermore, by setting the first display period from when a character first appears to when the character first leaves to the shortest period, it is possible to prevent group preview effects from being suddenly executed. Can be done.

(1-3) The first character displayed in the first display period is a character with a high priority in the content of the gaming machine (for example, Yumu-chan, the main character).

As a result, the first character to appear in a group preview performance is a high-priority character such as the main character, and is a character familiar to the player, but after that, characters that appear less frequently than the main character in other performances, etc. By appearing in the group preview performance, the player can be surprised about the group preview performance and can be made to feel that it is a rare performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

"Characters with high priority" include characters that have the highest priority among the main character and characters other than the main character that appear in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 more than other characters. Includes characters that appear frequently (number of times) in the performance.

(1-4) When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of a variation pattern with variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), the display of the character in the group effect is first started at a timing close to half of the second predetermined period in the first half of the second predetermined period (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61).

As a result, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a winning display result, even if the group preview effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time, the group preview effect will be executed near the second half even in the first half. This allows the lingering impression of the group preview performance to be extended to a later stage.

(1-5) A pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, the variation patterns of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26) indicates that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result. After making it appear that the variable display result is the specific display result, the variable display result includes a relief pattern (for example, a variation pattern with variation numbers 23 and 26),
Also in the relief pattern, in the second predetermined period from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is the specific display result, the first half of the second predetermined period is One display period starts (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61).

As a result, even in the case of a rescue pattern in which the display result of the variable display is made to appear to be a loss display result, and the display result of the variable display is a win display result, the fanfare performance, which is a blessing performance, is executed. , a group preview performance is performed during the first half of the variable display time to create a feeling of elation, and even if the elation fades over time, a blessing performance is used to maintain or revive the elation. You can

(1-6) A pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned losing display result (for example, the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, and 15) and a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned specific display result In the case of a pattern that suggests that it is (for example, the variation pattern of main variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result or the specific display result, A common display is performed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 87 to 136).

As a result, for example, the variation pattern with variation number 9 and the variation pattern with variation number 20 will perform a common effect until the display result is finalized, and the variation pattern with variation number 12 and the variation pattern with variation number 23 will display the same effect. A common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed, and a common effect is executed between the variation pattern with variation number 15 and the variation pattern with variation number 26 until the display result is confirmed. It is possible to draw the attention of the players to the fact that the group preview performance is executed while the player is in the middle of the game.

Note that the display result of the variable display is a pattern that suggests that the display result is the above-mentioned losing display result (for example, the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, and 15), and the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned specific display result. (For example, the variation patterns of main variation numbers 20, 23, and 26) are different displays until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result or the specific display result. may be performed.

Thereby, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the group preview performance is executed while mutually different performances are being executed.

(1-7) The execution period of the group performance and a preview performance that is different from the group preview and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result (for example, SP first half title preview performance) The execution period of
The preview performance ends after the third display period ends,
The display in the group effect has a larger display area than the display in the preview effect (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 151 to 157).

Thereby, even if the group preview performance is executed while a preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance is being executed, the SP first half title preview performance can be shown to the player.

(1-8) While the preview effect is being executed, the group effect is executed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 151 to 157).

Thereby, when a preview performance such as an SP first half title preview performance is being executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the group preview performance. Note that the preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance and the group preview performance do not start to be executed at the same time.

(1-9) When the group effect is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is higher than when the preview effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. , group previews are more reliable than SP first half title previews).

As a result, other preview effects that have lower expectations for jackpots than the group preview effects will not be displayed in the front layer, which has a higher priority than the group preview effects, so players will be able to receive a jackpot in a favorable manner. suggestions can be made. In this manner, in the present embodiment, a performance with a low expectation level of a jackpot is not placed in front of a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot.

(1-12) During the execution of the group effect, the brightness of both the background display and the display in the preview effect decreases, while the display of information regarding the game (for example, the number of first pending memories and the second pending memory) decreases in brightness. The brightness does not decrease in the fourth symbol 5J showing the number, the small symbol 5M, the first reserved memory display area 5D, the second reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5A).

As a result, when a group preview effect is executed, the brightness of the background display and images related to other preview effects (for example, images related to the SP first half title preview effect, which has lower expectations than the group preview effect) are lowered, while We give high priority to the display of information related to games that are of high importance to players in terms of winnings, losses, and advantages, and do not lower the brightness even when the group preview effect is executed. Can show information.

(2-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the initially displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation occurs in which a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 57 and 94).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in a group preview performance, it is possible to avoid creating doubts as to whether or not this is a group preview performance or misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can.

The “first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed” means that the entire initially displayed character is still displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 57(a). A situation where a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 while not being displayed, or a situation where the gaming machine frame 3 is displayed as an image, as shown in FIG. 94(a). In the display area that is visible to the player while covering the screen of the device 5, the entirety of the initially displayed character is not yet displayed, but the character is displayed at the edge of the display area that is visible to the player. Including situations where part of the is displayed. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which the first character appearing is not completely visible, but a part of the first character appearing is visible.

“A second situation in which a part of the character displayed first is displayed more than in the first situation and a part of the character displayed second is displayed” is shown in FIG. 57(b). As shown in FIG. 94(b), and the second displayed character is not displayed in its entirety, but a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or as shown in FIG. 94(b). As shown in , in the display area visible to the player when the gaming machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character that was initially displayed is not yet displayed. At the end of the display area that is visible to the player, a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation, and while the entire second displayed character is not yet displayed, the character is visible to the player. This includes a situation where a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which a second character appears following the first character before the first character appears completely.

(2-2) In the group effect, the character displayed first and the character displayed second have different positional coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction on the screen.

As a result, the first character and the second character do not overlap on the Y axis, so it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-3) Motion blur processing is performed on the display of characters in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 55).

This has the effect of making each character appear to be multiple characters, so it is possible to further prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-4) The sound suggesting the start of the group preview performance is output while the first character to be displayed in the group performance is being displayed, but the sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output before the display of the second character to be displayed starts. (For example, the example shown in FIG. 94).

As a result, a sound suggesting the start of the group preview performance is output and the first character appears, thereby informing the player that the group preview performance has been executed. Since the start sound ends before the character appears, it is possible to suitably provide a group preview effect.

The start sound may be output before the first character appears, or may be output at the same time as the first character appears, but ends by the time the second character appears. .

(2-5) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include characters whose whole bodies are displayed within the display area of the screen, and characters whose whole bodies do not fit within the display area of the screen and characters whose whole bodies are displayed outside of the display area of the screen. includes a character that is displayed within the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 53).

This allows more characters to appear in the group preview presentation in the limited display area.

(2-6) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include a first character (for example, maid A) and a second character (for example, maid B) whose type is different from the first character. ,
In each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the first character is displayed so that the whole body fits within the display area of the screen, and the first character whose whole body is displayed within the display area of the screen. The first character, which does not fit within the display area of the screen but is displayed with other parts of the whole body within the display area of the screen, is displayed in a mixed manner (for example, the example shown in FIG. 53).

Thereby, it is possible to create the illusion that more types of characters appear in the group preview presentation in the limited display area.

(2-7) A part of the screen is covered by a shielding object (for example, the gaming machine frame 3), and the character that is first displayed in the group presentation is displayed at the position covered by the shielding object. starts, and then the display of the second displayed character starts,
Even if the screen is viewed while covered by the shielding object, the first situation changes to the second situation in the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 57).

As a result, even in the display area of the screen that the player actually sees, there is no situation where only one person is displayed in a group preview effect, so there is no question as to whether or not it is a group preview effect, and only one person appears. It is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that this is not the case.

(2-8) When viewing the gaming machine from the side toward between the screen and the shielding object, it is possible to view the edge of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a player views the pachinko machine 1 from the side and sees the edge of the screen, there is no situation where only one player is displayed in the group preview presentation, so the group preview presentation It is possible to avoid questions such as whether or not this is true or not, or the misunderstanding that only one person will appear.

(2-9) At the design stage, a display related to the group effect is created with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position of the shielding object on a screen of a predetermined size, and further, a display related to the group effect is created on a screen of a predetermined size (for example, In order to be applicable to a size larger than 19 inches (for example, 20 inches), a display related to the group effect is created up to an area corresponding to the large size.

Thereby, even if the design of the pachinko game machine 1 is suddenly changed to use a size larger than the predetermined size, the data of the created group preview effect can be applied.

(2-10) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include low importance characters (for example, maids C to F) that are less important in the content of the gaming machine, and characters that are more important than the low importance characters. Including high-importance characters (for example, maids A and B) that are highly important in the content of the gaming machine,
The high-importance character is displayed at a lower rate than the low-importance character, whose face does not fit within the display area of the screen and the parts of the whole body other than the face fit within the display area of the screen (for example, Example shown in 53).

Thereby, characters with high importance such as the main character can have their faces more easily recognized in the group preview presentation than characters with low importance such as supporting characters, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
Equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47) that executes a performance,
The performance executed by the performance execution means includes a group performance (for example, a group preview performance shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group,
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
The group performance is a performance that displays the largest number of characters among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, in the group preview performance, the largest number of characters appear among all the performances, so it is possible to make the player aware that a variable display is being performed in which he can expect to win a jackpot.

"The group effect is the effect with the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, This includes that the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen is the group preview performance. Furthermore, "the group effect is the effect with the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all the effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1, Among the performances that are executed during the period when the variable display based on the suspended memory of 1 is being performed, such as the performance when the symbol is displayed variablely, the performance when the reach is reached, the pseudo continuous performance, the performance when a jackpot occurs, etc. This includes that the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen is the group preview performance. In addition, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of displayed characters among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" is executed during the jackpot game state or in the subsequent probability variable state or time saving state. Among the performances, the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on one screen is the group preview performance. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of types of characters to be displayed.

Furthermore, "the group effect is the effect that has the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, This includes that the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance is the group preview performance. Furthermore, "the group effect is the effect with the largest number of characters displayed among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" means that among all the effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1, Among the performances executed during the period when the variable display based on the suspended memory in 1 is being performed, such as the performance when the symbol is variablely displayed, the performance when the reach is reached, the pseudo continuous performance, the performance when the jackpot occurs, etc. This includes that the production with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens in the group preview production is included. In addition, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of displayed characters among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" is executed during the jackpot game state or in the subsequent probability variable state or time saving state. Among the performances, the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance is the group preview performance. In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of types of characters to be displayed.

(3-2) A performance in which the number of characters displayed is smaller than that of the group performance, and a specific performance in which a plurality of characters are displayed (for example, the second half of the SP reach or the final reach) is executed.

This makes it possible to perform a variety of performances, among which the largest number of characters can appear in the group preview performance.

Note that the specific performance may be a performance in which the number of types of characters to be displayed is greater than that of the group preview performance.

(3-3) The number of characters displayed in the second display period of the group effect is greater than the number of characters displayed in the specific effect.

Thereby, a powerful performance can be shown to the player during the second display period, which is the longest period among the group preview performances.

Note that the number of character types displayed in the second display period of the group preview performance may be greater than the number of character types displayed in the specific performance.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
In the group performance,
An auxiliary display will be displayed to show that the character is progressing.
When the display of the first character and the display of the second character overlap, the display of the first character takes priority over the display of the second character, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character When the display of the second character overlaps with the display of the second character, the display of the second character is given priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 54).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, by providing an auxiliary display for characters, it is possible to show a more dynamic group preview effect to the player, but since the auxiliary display does not obstruct the visibility of other characters, it is possible to display more characters. It can be clearly shown to the player.

The "auxiliary display" may be any display that shows that the character is progressing; for example, an image display that emphasizes that the character is progressing as shown in FIG. For example, it may be an image display of sand smoke), an image display showing traces of the character's path (for example, an image display of the character's footprints), or an image display attached to the character itself (for example, an image display of the character's footprints). , an image display representing the character's aura). The "auxiliary display" may be any image display that is performed near the character in relation to the progress of the character.

(4-2) The character display in the group effect and the auxiliary display in the group effect have different layers displayed on the screen (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, the image of sand smoke is layer 1, the character images are placed in layers after layer 2).

Thereby, in the group preview performance, the character images and the auxiliary display can be suitably shown to the player.

(4-3) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include a plurality of characters of the same type (for example, character C of layers 9 and 10),
The video data corresponding to the group effect includes first character data (e.g., video data of character C in layer 9) and second character data (e.g., character C in layer 10) corresponding to each of a plurality of characters of the same type. video data),
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values regarding the moving speed of the character, but have the same animation parameter values regarding the character's motion.

As a result, even when changing the moving speed of the characters, by standardizing the animation parameter values related to the character's movements, it is possible to reduce the work steps involved in designing the group preview effect.

(4-4) In the group effect, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed at the coordinates placed on the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 52).

Thereby, since a plurality of characters do not move in the same way at the same position, it is possible to suitably show the group preview effect to the player.

(5-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Equipped with a crowd preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
In the first display period, the display of a newly displayed character (for example, the second displayed character) ends before the display of the first displayed character ends (for example, in FIG. 96).

The "newly displayed character" may be the second character that appears in the group preview presentation as shown in FIGS. 94 to 96, or the character that appears third or later in the group preview presentation. You can. Considering that the group preview performance is a performance in which multiple characters advance as a group, the second character that appears in the group preview performance is the first character displayed as the "newly displayed character." It is preferable for the second character to appear immediately after the character to overtake the first character to create a sense of dynamism and realism.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Further, since the second character to appear disappears at the top, overtaking the first character to appear, it is possible to present a lively group preview performance to the player.

(5-2) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include a character that overtakes other characters,
The number of overtaking characters is either greater or less than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the group preview presentation from becoming too complicated, and it is possible to present the group preview presentation with a sense of dynamism to the players. can be shown.

(5-3) When the overtaking character overtakes the other character, when the display of the overtaking character and the display of the other character overlap, the outline of the overtaking character is smaller than the outline of the other character. Also displayed in bold (for example, the example shown in FIG. 56).

This allows the player to easily see how the character overtakes other characters.

(6-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Crowd preview performance) and
Executing a suggestion effect (for example, a PUSH effect) that displays a suggestion image (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!") that suggests the execution of the group effect. means (for example, processing for executing a PUSH effect by the effect control CPU 120),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
The display of the suggestion image ends before the first display period in the group effect starts (for example, the example shown in FIG. 93).

The "suggestive image" may be any image that suggests the execution of a group preview effect, or may be an image that prompts the player to operate the operating means as shown in FIG. 93. , it may be an effect image such as a light or pattern that is executed before suggesting the execution of a group preview effect, or it may be a clock image in a timer effect that measures the time until the group preview effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be a character image that suggests the execution of a group preview effect (for example, a character image of "Group"). In addition, in the timer performance, the time until the group preview performance is executed is measured using a clock image, and when the time measured reaches a predetermined time, a character image (the character "Group") indicating the execution of the group preview performance is displayed. (images) may also be displayed.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Furthermore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the character appears first.

(6-2) After the display of the effect related to the suggestion image (for example, the effect indicating that the push button 31B has been pressed) ends, the display of the character starts for the first time in the first display period (for example, example shown in FIG. 93).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the first appearance of the character.

(6-3) The suggestion image includes an image that prompts the player to operate the operating means (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!"),
The output of the sound (for example, PUSH sound) when the operation means is operated during the display of the suggestion image ends before the character display starts for the first time in the first display period (for example, in FIG. 93 example shown in ).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the first appearance of the character.

(6-4) When the operation means is operated while the suggestion image is being displayed, any one of a plurality of performances including the group performance (for example, a six-person group preview, a background preview, a lamp preview) is executed. (For example, examples shown in FIGS. 93, 102, and 103).

As a result, a plurality of performances are executed with the operation by the player as a turning point, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(7-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Equipped with a group of people preview performance, a group of dogs preview performance shown in Figures 168 to 170),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
The group performance includes a first group performance (for example, a six-person group preview performance) and a second group performance (for example, a dog group preview performance),
The plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect each advance at the same or substantially the same first speed (for example, speed V1),
The plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect each advance at the same or substantially the same second speed (for example, speed V2),
the first speed is faster than the second speed,
The first group effect is configured such that the straight-line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character is longer than the second group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 170). .

The "straight line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character" is displayed first in a group preview performance such as a six-person group preview performance or a dog group preview performance, as shown in Figure 170. This is the straight-line distance (distance along the X-axis) from the end of the character to the end of the character that is last displayed. This straight-line distance is determined by the time T, where T is the time from when the first character is displayed to when the last character is displayed from the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and the speed of each character is V. It can be calculated by multiplying the speed V (T×V).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. Furthermore, two types of group preview performances can be suitably shown to the players.

(7-2) The execution time of the first group effect (for example, X1/V1) is the same or approximately the same as the execution time of the second group effect (for example, X2/V2) (for example, as shown in FIG. example shown).

Thereby, two types of group preview effects can be executed using the same or substantially the same time.

(7-3) When the second group effect is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is higher than when the first group effect is executed,
The execution probability of the second group effect is lower than the execution probability of the first group effect.

As a result, for dog group preview performances that have a lower execution probability and higher expectations than six-person group previews, by making the speed of the characters slower than for six-person group previews, for example, a player can take a picture of a character in a dog group preview performance. You can increase your chances of doing so.

(7-4) The degree to which a plurality of characters displayed in the second group presentation are crowded (for example, density D2) is the degree to which a plurality of characters displayed in the first group presentation are crowded (for example, density D2). degree D1).

Thereby, in the group preview performance, the characters are arranged at an appropriate density in consideration of the speed and movement distance of the characters, so that it is possible to provide the player with a suitable group preview performance.

(7-5) In the second group production, a plurality of characters located at the end of the screen are arranged from the bottom to the top of the screen,
On the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, a display corresponding to the subsequent performance is performed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 169).

Thereby, it is possible to use the group preview performance as an opportunity to switch to an image for the next performance and show it to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(8-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. ,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group effect execution process shown in FIG. 47, a Boingo effect shown in FIGS. 158 to 167) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Equipped with a group preview performance),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
In the first display period, the display of the character is started from a specific position so that the character advances from the back side to the front side on the screen,
At a timing related to the initial start of display of the character at the specific position, a preliminary display (for example, display of a preliminary image using a light effect) that makes the display of the character at the particular position difficult to see is performed (for example, , example shown in FIG. 158).

The "previous display" may be any display that makes it difficult to see the character, and may be any display that hides the specific position where the character appears (for example, display of effect images such as lights or patterns) etc.). "Difficult to see" refers to a state in which the player cannot see a specific position completely, a state in which the player can see a certain position but it is difficult to see it, a state in which the player can see a certain position but the character is not visible from the specific position. This includes a state in which the appearance of the character appearing cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the player can visually recognize a specific position and can visually recognize the appearance of the character from the specific position, but it is difficult to visually recognize the character.

"Timing related to the first start of character display at a specific position" means the same timing as the first start of character display at a specific position, or the timing related to the first start of character display at a specific position. This includes timings within predetermined periods before and after (this predetermined period is a period during which the player is under the illusion that this is the timing at which the display of the character first starts at a specific position).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, since the first character is displayed from a specific position that has become difficult to see due to the display of the previous image, it is possible to display the character from the beginning at a certain size, which may cause an unnatural feeling such as a large character suddenly being displayed. to prevent players from experiencing this.

(8-2) In the first display period, the character is enlarged and displayed so as to proceed from the depth direction to the front direction on the screen,
The enlarged character makes it difficult to see the character displayed at the specific position (example shown in FIG. 164).

This makes it possible to create a visual effect that makes it appear as if multiple characters are appearing one after another from a certain depth.

(8-3) The character that is displayed last in the group presentation is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end opposite to the one end (example shown in FIG. 162). .

Thereby, it is possible to suitably switch to the performance after the group preview performance using the image display of the last character.

(8-4) In conjunction with the action of the character displayed last in the group performance, the background display displayed in the third display period is switched to the background display corresponding to the subsequent performance (for example, in FIG. 162 , example shown in FIG. 163).

Thereby, it is possible to suitably switch to the performance after the group preview performance using the image display of the last character.

(8-5) The character displayed last in the group presentation is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end opposite to the one end,
No other characters in the group presentation are displayed on the back side of the last character displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 164).

As a result, even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it cannot be seen, so there is no need to place the subsequent character image, and it is as if multiple characters are being placed one after another from a position with depth. It is possible to create a visual effect that makes it appear as if a character is appearing.

(9-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Crowd preview performance) and
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and adjusts the volume of the effect sound at a predetermined volume during the subsequent first display period. A specific volume is set higher than a predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to be the specific volume also in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume smaller than the specific volume in the third display period. The performance sound is output.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, by increasing the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at the specific volume during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group preview performance at the specific volume even before the second display period. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The volume may be controlled to be raised or lowered by the sound output means, or the volume control of the sound output means is constant, but the volume increase or decrease is specified in the sound data referred to by the sound output means. The volume may be raised or lowered depending on the sound.

(9-2) The fade-in time from when the production sound is output in the first display period until the volume of the production sound rises to a specific volume is the fade-in time from when the volume of the production sound starts to decrease in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the effect sound disappears (for example, the example shown in FIG. 59).

As a result, the sound in the group preview performance is faded in for a short time and faded out for a longer time than the fade in, so that the sound for the group preview performance can be suitably output.

(10-1) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group effect execution means (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 47, a group preview execution process shown in FIGS. 94 to 100) that executes a group effect (for example, a group preview effect) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters advance as a group. Crowd preview performance) and
A plurality of lighting means (for example, game effect lamps 9 such as frame lamps),
The display period of images in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 59),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends for the first time (for example, 94 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 96 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues (for example, when 97 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 98 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character (for example, as shown in FIG. 99 (a37) to FIG. 100 (a42) period),
A brightness data table composed of a plurality of brightness data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means is a first brightness data table corresponding to the first display period (for example, a frame lamp shown in FIG. 64(a)). a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period (for example, a grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in FIG. 64(b)), and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period. a data table (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W3 shown in FIG. 64(c));
Each of the first brightness data table and the second brightness data table includes first brightness data that is a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness and data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness. and a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness and data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness is composed of second brightness data different from the first brightness data (for example, as shown in FIG. Example of grandchild table for frame lamp shown in 64),
The second brightness data table is set to light more of the lighting means at higher brightness than the first brightness data table (for example, the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps is the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps). High brightness ('0' to 'F') data is stored in more lamps than the number of lamps.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display ends. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect. In addition, a brightness data table corresponding to each display period is provided, and since the second brightness data table is designed to light the lamp at higher brightness than the first brightness data table, the second brightness data table is designed to light the lamp at higher brightness than the first brightness data table. In the second display period, weak footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear, and in the second display period, strong footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear one after another, providing a more suitable group preview effect to the player. can be provided.

"Data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness" and "data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness" are the data for the plurality of lighting parts included in each lighting means (for example, RGB in the frame left lamp 9L1, This is the lighting data (lighting element) for each time (WWW) in the upper lamp 9C, and for example, in the example shown in FIG. be. Note that as RGB data, data corresponding to turning off the light is "000," data corresponding to low-intensity lighting is "100," and data corresponding to high-intensity lighting is "F00."

"Brightness data" is lighting data for each lighting means (for example, frame lamp, panel lamp 9C) for each hour, and includes "data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness" and "data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness". For example, in the example shown in FIG. 64(a), this is data for the frame left lamp 9L and frame right lamp 9R at T1-1.

The brightness data table is a collection of "brightness data" for a predetermined period (for example, the lighting time specified in the parent table or child table), and for example, in the example shown in FIG. 64(a), T1-1 to T1- This is data for the frame left lamp 9L and frame right lamp 9R in No. 11.

(10-2) The first brightness data table has a longer brightness data switching interval than the second brightness data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals). , the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

Thereby, it can be expressed that the character is running faster in the second display period than in the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(10-3) In the first luminance data table, the switching intervals of luminance data are equal intervals, while in the second luminance data table, the switching intervals of luminance data are not equal intervals (for example, as shown in FIG. 63). (The grandchild table W1 for frame lamps is switched at intervals of 100 msec, and the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec.)

Thereby, in the second display period, it is possible to express that a plurality of characters are running out of step, compared to the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-1) The first brightness data table includes brightness data for moving the lighting location in the direction in which the characters advance in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is Lights up with high brightness according to the direction of advance of the notice),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that does not move the lighting location in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. (lights up with brightness).

This makes it possible to represent a character appearing in the first display period and a plurality of characters appearing one after another in the second display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-2) The first brightness data table lights up the lighting means located near the character at high brightness in accordance with the advancing position of the character first displayed in the group presentation, so that the character It includes luminance data for turning off or lighting at low luminance the lighting means located near the unreached location (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 64(a)).

As a result, the lamp will turn on at high brightness as the first character that is displayed at the front advances, and the lamp will turn off or turn on at low brightness in areas that have not yet been reached, so the lamp will not turn on. It can be used to express the progress of a character running at the front. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-3) The first brightness data table causes the lighting means to turn on at high brightness, and then, as the first character displayed in the group presentation advances, the lighting means turns off or turns on at low brightness. It includes luminance data (for example, the example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 64(a)).

As a result, the lamp will turn on at high brightness as the first character running at the front advances, and the lamp will turn off or turn on at low brightness at points that have not yet been reached or points that have already been passed. , the progress of the leading character can be expressed using the lighting of lamps. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-4) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the lighting means to light up at high brightness, and then lights up at high brightness the lighting means located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group presentation. (For example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 64(a)),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the lighting means to light up at high brightness, and then does not cause the lighting means located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance to light up at high brightness (for example, FIG. 64 (Example of grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in (b)).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamp lights up at high brightness as the first character running at the front advances, and the lamp turns off at points that have not yet been reached or points that have already been passed. Alternatively, since the lamp is lit at low brightness, the progress of the character running at the front can be expressed using the lighting of the lamp. Furthermore, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters advance one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(11-5) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the lighting means to light up at high brightness and turns off the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the frame shown in FIG. 64(a) Example of grandchild table W1 for lamp),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness and for lighting the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 shown in FIG. 64(b) example).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamp lights up at high brightness as the first character running at the front advances, and the lamp turns off at points that have not yet been reached or points that have already been passed. Alternatively, since the lamp is lit at low brightness, the progress of the character running at the front can be expressed using the lighting of the lamp. Furthermore, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters advance one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(12-1) The third brightness data table includes brightness data for increasing the number of lighting means to be turned off in accordance with the progress of the characters in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, Table W3 is turned off or turned on at low brightness according to the direction of advance of the group notice).

Accordingly, in the third display period, the lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness as the character progresses, so it is possible to express the progress of the character using turning off or lighting the lamp. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(12-3) The third brightness data table specifies that the switching interval of brightness data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance is shorter than the switching interval of the luminance data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located opposite to the direction in which the frame moves (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the switching interval of the frame left lamp 9L is 10 msec) (The switching interval of the frame right lamp 9R is 80 msec).

Thereby, in the third display period, it is possible to represent the character progressing from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and disappearing. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(13-1) In the first luminance data table, control of the lighting means starts at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and control of the lighting means ends during the first display period,
The second luminance data table indicates that control of the lighting means starts during the first display period, continues control of the lighting means during the second display period, and starts control of the lighting means during the third display period. control of the means ends;
In the third brightness data table, control of the lighting means starts during the third display period (for example, the example of the group preview brightness data table shown in FIG. 85).

As a result, the lamp lights up at high brightness from the middle of the first display period in the same way as the second display period, so the progress of the character from before the second display period can be enlivened and expressed by the lighting of the lamp. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(13-2) The second luminance data table has a longer control period for the lighting means than the first luminance data table and the third luminance data table,
In the first brightness data table, the control period of the lighting means is set longer than in the third brightness data table (for example, the example of the group preview brightness data table shown in FIG. 85).

Thereby, the appearance of a plurality of characters appearing one after another in the first display period can be expressed with an appropriate length. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(14-1) The brightness data first specified in the first brightness data table is the brightness data that causes the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect to be turned off or turned on at low brightness (for example, as shown in FIG. 63). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, the initial luminance data for all the lamps is turned off or turned on at low brightness).

As a result, the lamps will be turned on once the group preview performance is executed after adding a break, without mixing with the lighting of the lamps that was performed before the group preview performance is executed, making it more suitable. It is possible to provide a group preview performance.

(14-2) The brightness data initially specified in each of the second brightness data table and the third brightness data table is a brightness that does not cause the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect to be turned off or turned on at low brightness. data (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, in the frame lamp grandchild tables W2 and W3, the lamps are lit at high brightness for the first brightness data).

As a result, when the characters are progressing one after another after the group preview effect has been executed, the player can watch the group preview effect without being separated by turning off all the lamps or lighting them at low brightness, with emphasis on the flow of the effect. can be shown. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(14-3) The last luminance data specified in the third luminance data table is luminance data that causes the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect to be turned off or turned on at low luminance (for example, as shown in FIG. 63). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W3, the last luminance data for all the lamps is turned off or turned on at low brightness).

Thereby, when the group preview performance ends, all the lamps are turned off or turned on at low brightness, thereby making it possible for the player to recognize that the group preview performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(15-1) The first brightness data table is designed not to repeat brightness data with the same control content, while the second brightness data table is designed to repeat brightness data with the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 63, brightness data is not specified so that the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2.) brightness data is specified as follows).

This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(15-2) The third luminance data table is designed so as not to repeat luminance data with the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the same luminance data is not repeated in the frame lamp grandchild table W3). Luminance data is not specified for repeated use).

As a result, with regard to the brightness data in the third display period, which is set to be shorter than the second display period, the degree of freedom in design is increased by defining the brightness data as is. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(16-1) The first brightness data table is designed not to repeat brightness data with the same control content, while the second brightness data table is designed to repeat brightness data with the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 63, brightness data is not specified so that the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps, and the same brightness data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W2 for frame lamps. The brightness data is specified as follows),
In the first luminance data table, the luminance data for troubleshooting is defined last, while in the second luminance data table, the luminance data for troubleshooting is not defined last (for example, As shown in FIG. 63, 10-minute data for troubleshooting is defined in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and 10-minute data for troubleshooting is not defined in the frame lamp grandchild table W2).

This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. On the other hand, regarding the brightness data in the first display period, the brightness data is specified as is, but instead, 10-minute data for troubleshooting is specified, so that troubleshooting can be done during that 10 minutes. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(16-2) The brightness data for troubleshooting is the brightness data for which the longest time has been specified among the brightness data constituting the first brightness data table, and the brightness data is the brightness data for which the longest time has been specified among the brightness data constituting the first brightness data table, and This is brightness data for preventing the lighting means from being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 63, 10-minute data for troubleshooting is defined in the frame lamp grandchild table W1).

As a result, it is possible to prevent lamp lighting control from being performed from the beginning of the first luminance data table using the 10-minute data for troubleshooting, so it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(16-3) The brightness data for troubleshooting is brightness data for regularly lighting up the adjacent lighting means in order (for example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the brightness data for troubleshooting for 10 minutes The brightness data is such that adjacent frame lamps are lit in order and regularly so that the lighting locations are shifted from the previous state).

As a result, even if a malfunction occurs, adjacent frame lamps are lit in order and in a regular manner so that the lighting location is shifted from the previous state, making it possible to prevent the appearance from becoming unsightly. It is possible to provide a group preview performance.

(17-1) The lighting means includes monochrome lighting means that lights up in a single color (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8), and multi-color lighting means that lights up in a plurality of colors (for example, on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9). ~9C13),
The brightness data for lighting the monochrome lighting means at a specific high brightness includes a specific value (for example, "6") as a value corresponding to the lighting at the specific high brightness,
The brightness data for lighting the multi-color lighting means at the specific high brightness includes a value larger than the specific value (for example, "8" to "F") as a value corresponding to lighting at the specific high brightness.

This makes it possible to adjust the variation in light between lamps that are lit at high brightness by setting an appropriate value for lighting at high brightness depending on the type of light emitting means, and to create a suitable group preview effect. can be provided.

(17-2) The monochrome lighting means includes a first color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that lights up in a first color, and a second color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that lights up in a second color. lamps 9B1 to 9B5);
Regardless of the luminance data for lighting either the first color lighting means or the second color lighting means at the specific high brightness, the specific value (for example, " 6”).

As a result, variations in light can be adjusted even between lamps that are lit in the same single color, and a suitable group preview effect can be provided.

(18-1) Both the first brightness data table and the second brightness data table include different brightness data for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, in FIG. Frame lamp grandchild table shown),
The brightness data table used in a preview performance that is different from the group performance and foretells that the display result of the variable display will become the specific display result is based on the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine. Common brightness data is included for each (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 71).

As a result, in the group preview performance, by individually controlling the lighting of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R, it is possible to realize a more detailed lighting mode, and it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. can.

(19-1) During the execution of a preview effect (for example, a reach line effect) that is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result, the group effect interrupts. It may be executed with
Even when the group effect is interrupted and executed, the lighting means continues to light up according to the brightness data table corresponding to the preview effect (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 171 and 172),
The lighting means used in the group performance is the same as the lighting means used in the preview performance, or includes the lighting means used in the preview performance and the lighting means not used in the preview performance. (For example, as shown in FIG. 70, in the reach line performance, there is a period in which the on-board lamp and attacker lamp, which are always used in the group preview performance, are not used).

As a result, even if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, since the common lamp is lit, the lighting performance can be realized without any discomfort, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided. be able to. For example, if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, the lighting of lamps in the group preview performance and the lighting of lamps in the other preview performance will be mixed, but if the lamps lit in both are If they are different from each other, a large number of lamps will be lit in a complicated manner, which will look bad and may give the player a sense of discomfort. In this regard, if the lighting of the lamps in the group preview performance is the same as the lighting of the lamps in other preview performances, it is possible to prevent a large number of lamps from being lit in a complicated manner.

(19-2) The preview performance ends during the execution of the group performance, and a predetermined performance (for example, a symbol feeding performance) different from the preview performance is executed (for example, FIGS. 171 and 172). example shown),
The lighting means used in the group effect is the same as the lighting means used in the predetermined effect, or includes the lighting means used in the predetermined effect and the lighting means not used in the predetermined effect. (For example, examples shown in FIGS. 171 and 172).

As a result, even if the group preview performance is switched to another performance, the common lamp is lit, so it is possible to realize the lighting performance without any discomfort, and it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. .

(19-3) The group performance is executed with a predetermined execution probability of less than 100% (for example, the group preview lottery shown in FIG. 30).

As a result, whether or not to perform the group preview performance is decided by lottery regardless of other performances, so the processing load related to the execution of the group preview performance can be reduced, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided. .

(20-1) The lighting means includes a specific lighting means (for example, V lamp 9G) located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance,
The specific lighting means can be turned on when controlling to the advantageous state, and does not turn on when not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the V lamp 9G is set to turn on during a round in a jackpot game state in which a V winning can occur). (Lights up to notify you that it is inside or that a V prize has occurred),
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table do not include brightness data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, the example of the brightness data table shown in FIG. 63).

As a result, a lamp located at a position related to the direction in which the characters move in the group preview performance lights up during the group preview performance, causing the player to misunderstand that they are in an advantageous state such as winning the jackpot. It is possible to prevent it from being put away. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(20-2) The lighting means includes specific lighting means (for example, a stick controller lamp 9J, a trigger button lamp 9K) located at a position related to the direction in which the character moves in the group performance,
The specific lighting means indicates to the player that the operation of the operating means is valid (for example, the stick controller lamp 9J lights up to prompt the player to pull the stick controller 31A, and the trigger The button lamp 9K lights up to prompt the user to press the push button 31B),
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table do not include brightness data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, the example of the brightness data table shown in FIG. 63).

As a result, a lamp located at a position related to the direction in which the characters move in the group preview effect lights up during the group preview effect, causing the player to misunderstand that the lamp is prompting the player to operate the operating means. This can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

[Modified example]
A modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained.

(About the display period of group preview performances)
In this embodiment, the third display period is longer than the first display period, but the first display period may be longer than the third display period.

Thereby, by making the character that first appears in the first display period appear longer, it is possible to make it easier to draw attention to the fact that the group preview effect suggesting a jackpot has been executed.

(About the execution timing of the group preview performance)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a losing display result, there is a 100% probability that the group preview effect is executed in the latter half of the variable display time, but this is not limited to this. do not have. For example, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a losing display result, even if the group preview effect is executed with a higher probability in the second half of the variable display time than in the first half of the variable display time. good.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if the variable display result is a winning display result, the group preview effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time with a 100% probability. Not limited to. For example, in the case of a variable pattern in which the variable display result is a winning display result, even if the group preview effect is executed with a higher probability in the first half of the variable display time than in the second half of the variable display time. good.

(About the characters that appear in the group preview)
In this embodiment, the main character, Maid A (Yume-chan), appears as the first character in the first display period, but the character that appears most often in the second display period is the main character, Maid A. (Yumemu-chan) may be.

Thereby, the main character can be frequently shown to the player during the second display period, which is the longest, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the first character displayed in the first display period may be a premium character.

Thereby, the premium character can be shown to the player first in the first display period, and the group preview performance can be made to have an impact. Note that if the first character displayed in the first display period is a premium character, a jackpot may be determined. Furthermore, in this case, the lighting pattern of each lamp such as the frame lamp may be a pattern including a rainbow (seven colors).

Note that the premier character may be a character with the lowest appearance rate among all states and performances, or may be a character that does not appear except in group preview performances. Moreover, the premium character may be a character whose appearance suggests that there is a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than other characters.

(About lighting control in group preview presentation)
In this embodiment, the brightness data is defined as shown in the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 64, but the brightness data may be defined as follows. That is, first specific brightness data is a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness and data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness, and data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness. There is second specific brightness data that does not include data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness, the first brightness data table does not include the first specific lighting data, and the second brightness data table has Specific lighting data may also be used.

In this way, data for lighting at high brightness is not specified in the first display period, so it is possible to express the appearance of multiple characters approaching by lighting the lamp at low brightness, and the second display period During the display period, data that lights up at high brightness is specified, so it is possible to express the progress of a plurality of characters one after another.

Further, the third brightness data table may include brightness data that turns off all the lighting means that were turned on in the second brightness data table.

In this way, the progress and disappearance of the character in the third display period can be expressed by turning off the lamp.

Further, the lighting means includes a specific lighting means located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in the group performance,
A specific member that can transmit light is arranged on the front side of the specific lighting means,
By lighting the specific lighting means, the color that is visible through the specific member becomes a specific color,
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table include brightness data for lighting the lighting means in a color different from the specific color,
The first brightness data table and the second brightness data table may not include brightness data for lighting the specific lighting means.

In this way, when a lamp located at a position related to the direction in which the characters advance in a group preview effect lights up during the group preview effect, the light is transmitted through the transparent specific member located in front of the lamp. It is possible to prevent the visually recognized color from being a specific color that is not used in the group preview presentation, thereby interfering with the color tone of the group preview presentation. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview effect.

(About the video data of the group preview performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, video data in which a character to be moved and the action content (action pattern) of the character are associated in advance is created at the design stage, and the video data was stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 plays back the video data stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group preview performance comes, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It had become. However, the group preview presentation video may be played back using a method different from the above method.

For example, the data of the character to be acted upon and the data indicating the action details (movement pattern) may be stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 as separate data. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 updates the character data and movement patterns stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group preview performance comes, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It may also be possible to select each of the data shown in FIG.

More specifically, in the RAM 122 or ROM 121, a plurality of pieces of data in which characters A, B, and C each run or walk are stored in storage area 1, and a plurality of arbitrary pieces of data are stored, although the characters are not determined. What is necessary is to store in the storage area 2 video data showing a plurality of movement patterns of the characters related to the group preview performance, and the performance control CPU 120 stores the characters from the storage area 1 when the execution timing of the group preview performance comes. The video data related to the group preview performance may also be extracted from the storage area 2, the video data of one group preview performance may be created by combining them, and the created video data may be played back.

(Regarding cases where the group preview performance and other preview performances overlap)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 156 and 169, when the execution period of a group preview effect and the execution period of another preview effect overlap, the display area of the image in the group preview effect is the same as that of the other preview effect. Larger than the image display area, and the image display in the group preview performance has priority over the display of images in other preview performances (for example, the layer of image display in the group preview performance is larger than the image display area in other preview performances) (in front of the displayed layer). However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the execution period of a group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of another preview performance, the display area of the image in the other preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the image display area of the other preview performance is The display may be given priority over the display of images in the group preview performance (for example, the layer of image display in other preview performances may be in front of the layer of image display in the group preview performance). Alternatively, if the execution period of the group preview performance and the execution period of another preview performance overlap, the display area of the image in the group preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the other preview performance, and the image display area of the other preview performance is The display may be given priority over the display of images in the group preview performance (for example, the layer of image display in other preview performances may be in front of the layer of image display in the group preview performance). In addition, if the execution period of a group preview performance and the execution period of another preview performance overlap, the display area of the image in the other preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the image display area in the group preview performance is The display may be prioritized over the display of images in other preview performances (for example, the layer of image display in the group preview performance is in front of the layer of image display in other preview performances). In addition, when the display area of images in other preview performances is larger than the display area of images in the group preview performance, for example, for preview images that attract the attention of players, such as images suggesting a jackpot, the image display area in the group preview performance may Images that are hidden but located around the preview image (for example, images showing flames or an aura surrounding the preview image) include images that are not hidden by images in the group preview presentation and are visible.

(Example of time saving control without going through hit)
Next, as a time saving state, an example will be described in which time saving control is executed without going through a win (big hit, small hit, etc.).
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the characteristic parts and modifications described above, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always performed via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base (state). In other words, as the time saving state, time saving control that does not involve winning (big hit, small winning, etc.) may be executed.

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using random numbers dedicated to the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may also be used in conjunction with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

(A5) In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value. The lottery probabilities of these time saving symbols are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) Also, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a dedicated random number or another random number, It is acceptable to win a prize in the winning opening (the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) In addition, for winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and When using a small winning symbol random number, a specific small winning symbol random number can be used as a winning value, and when using a random number for a fall lottery judgment value in a time saving symbol lottery, a random number for a falling lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. , a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery of time-saving symbols is carried out using a structure, when the small winning symbol is used together with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) depends on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Avoid changing.

(A9) In addition, regarding winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing. In this case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

(A10) Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Also, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Furthermore, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

(A13) Furthermore, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times saved may be given differently depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

(A14) Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times 0" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of times is set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) Furthermore, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

(A18) In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated (for example, the small winning state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after winning a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability It is a low base state, and after the high probability low base state is finished after variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

(A20) In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

(A21) Also, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other time-saving control examples using time-saving symbols)
As other time saving control using time saving symbols, the following control may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the special symbol is displayed in the time-saving state. Based on the variable display result of the time-saving symbol being displayed, game control is not performed to move from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (even if the time-saving symbol is displayed, the time-saving state is overwritten (time-saving It may also be possible to control switching of the gaming state so that it occurs again. Then, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol (For example, in the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general losing symbol is displayed.) Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B2) In a gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays a common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. Different symbols may be displayed as a display result depending on the time-saving state and the time-saving state (for example, in the normal state, a decorative symbol displays a special symbol corresponding to the time-saving symbol, but in the time-saving state, it displays a simple losing symbol, etc.). (e.g., not displaying the pattern corresponding to the pattern). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display results of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect is performed that suggests whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol); however, in the time-saving state, the decorative symbol It may be arranged not to perform an effect that suggests whether or not the display result will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbols due to the performance in the time-saving state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative pattern (the time to maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result) is now different between the normal state and the time-saving state. May be controlled. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display of decorative symbols in a time-saving state, and can suppress a decline in game interest.

(B5) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time-saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification (information that instructs right-handed hitting), and when the time-saving state ends, a variable display based on the stored pending memory information is displayed. Until it's all over. It is also possible to not provide left-handed hitting notification (notification that instructs left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B6) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to not provide left-handed hitting notification (notification that instructs left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B7) Execute the left-handed hit notification in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation storage information stored when the time saving state ends. You can. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B8) When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, and when the variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information is displayed. In the case of a hit (small hit, jackpot) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed, the notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to the hit is different. It may be different. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining pending memory information stored when the time saving state ends, there is a common effect between when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no such pending memory information. It is possible to execute a different effect after executing (For example, when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the fourth pending memory information among the four remaining pending memories, the third pending memory Until the variable display based on the information, a common effect suggesting whether or not to return to the time-saving state is executed, and in the variable display based on the fourth suspended memory information, a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed. possible). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) An effect upon transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time saving state ends, and a variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information. The notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to a win is different from the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You can do it like this. As a result, the performance changes depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after displaying the final surface result) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed may be the same. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends, right-handed notification is not executed, and the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed on the display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B13) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the variable display result is small. It is possible to perform a common specific performance (reach performance, preview performance) in the case of a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a winning pattern or jackpot pattern, and in the case of a time-saving pattern (special display result), and multiple The proportion of time-saving symbols (special display results) may vary depending on which common specific performance is executed among the types of common specific performances. Then, when the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. Thereby, it is possible to suitably control the performance according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific performance, the display result may be a winning symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). Thereby, variations in the performance results of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control uses a common fluctuation pattern in the case of a winning symbol (specific display result), the case of a time-saving symbol (special display result), and the case of a losing symbol (predetermined display result). Even if the production control CPU 120 receives a command specifying the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 can select a different production in the variable display depending on the type of symbol specification command that specifies the display result. may be made executable. As a result, variations in the effects of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved by the special performance after the execution of the common specific performance.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, there may be cases in which a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, and cases in which it is not executed (for example, multiple types of special effects may be executed). (For example, when performing a super reach performance that has a high expectation of winning, a special performance is not executed.) As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B19) A predetermined performance different from the common specific performance (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a win (a display that has been moved from the display position of the pending display to another display position, and is currently being executed) The expectation level (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) is made to differ depending on the performance mode of the display display that can suggest the expectation level of winning corresponding to the variable display of Good too. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B20) In the special performance that can be executed when the time-saving design (special display result) occurs, after executing the performance (time-saving suggestion performance, etc.) that suggests the time-saving design (special display result), the winning symbol (specific It may also be possible to perform a performance (such as a special jackpot with a higher gaming value than in a time-saving state) that notifies the player of the display result). As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can control the time-saving states (special states) in which the number of time-savings (time-saving continuation period) differs depending on the type of time-saving symbols (special display results) provided in plural types (for example, the (1st time saving symbol: 50 time savings, 2nd time saving symbol: 100 time savings, etc.), the performance control CPU 120 is given when the time saving symbol stops depending on the type of performance executed (for example, the type of reach performance, etc.) It is also possible to perform effects with different number of time reductions (duration periods). As a result, depending on the type of performance, the player's attention is drawn to the number of times that the game is shortened after that, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

(B22) Controls the progress of the game by controlling the game to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. The transmitted commands include a special command that can specify transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the production control CPU 120 sends multiple types of commands including the special command. When received, based on the pre-reading of the pending memory information, it is specified that a variable display that can shift to a time-saving state (special state) will be executed. Execution may be restricted (not executed at all, only rarely executed, etc.). Thereby, performance control can be suitably executed according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B23) Based on the pre-reading of the pending storage information, pre-reading of the pending storage information that has occurred after the pending storage information where it has been specified that a variable display that can be shifted (controlled) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) will be executed. Execution of the preview performance may be restricted. Then, as the pre-read preview performance while the execution of such a pre-read preview performance is restricted, a common mode of performance may be made possible. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B24) When the variable display whose prefetch target is based on pending memory information is a variable display in which a time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and when the variable display that is not displayed as if the time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed. In both the case of display and the case of display, the execution of a prefetch preview effect for pending storage information generated after the relevant pending storage information may be restricted. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B25) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a performance whose expectation level is higher than a specific expectation level (for example, if the expectation level of the color of the pending display is blue < green < red, the prefetched preview performance is suspended) (such as not changing the display color to red). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B26) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, if the expectation level of the pending display color is blue < green < red, the color of the pending display is set to red. etc.). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using a variable number of displays that resulted in a predetermined display result, such as a variable display number of losers)
Next, an example of time saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of consecutive variable displays resulting in a loss) that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that does not become a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As shown below, the time saving state (special state) is when the number of consecutive variable displays with a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times). It may be possible to execute the following condition. Note that the predetermined result may be such that a time saving state (special state) can be executed on the condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in a losing display result reaches a special number of times.

(C1) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, the game is played based on the fact that the variable display result becomes the specific display result. The numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the user and that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is updated. Based on the above, when a special condition is established in which the number of executions (continuation number) of the variable display that resulted in the predetermined display result reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.), the normal state changes to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to transfer. The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, even in situations where either the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result is obtained continues to be updated, making it easier for players to be relieved in a time-saving state. , it is possible to increase the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize relief for the player due to the time saving condition.

(C2) The special condition is established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.). You may also do so. Thereby, when display results that are unfavorable to the player continue, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (variable probability state, time saving state). This makes it possible to suitably rescue the player when display results that are disadvantageous to the player occur consecutively.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be established by being controlled to the advantageous state. Thereby, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to bail out the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous situation, and it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time-saving state (special state) is executable, and the predetermined condition is may be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to rescue the player, such as when a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player occurs, and to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when variable display is executed a special number of times. This makes it possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state substantially occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief to the player.

(C7) When a power outage occurs due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is met, the data stored in the backup can be stored. The data may be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power outage is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, thereby suppressing disadvantages to the gaming parlor side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.), it is possible to control to a time saving state (special state) for a period equal to or more than the special number of times (for example, further 1000 times or more, etc.); During the time saving state (special state), the time saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state); A different effect may be performed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the variable display time is shorter in the second time saving state than in the first time saving state. It becomes possible to change the appearance of the performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Note that, without performing such a performance, the same performance may be performed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state). This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming more aware of the fact that they are in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled to a second time-saving state (special state), thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and the special condition is satisfied when the value of the special figure process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. A third process for controlling to a time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. Also. It is possible to separate the game balls into the first route (left side gaming area) and the second route (right side game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit in the first route, and in the time saving state (special state), the game ball is hit in the second route. A game is played by hitting a game ball into a path. During execution of the third process, although the time saving state (special state) is not controlled, a notification to the effect that firing should be made to the second route (for example, right-hand firing notification by a right-hand firing lamp, etc.) is made. You may also do so. Furthermore, while the third process is being executed, a notification may be made to notify that the time saving state (special state) will be entered. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, by lighting the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform a presentation that notifies the firing direction earlier (before the actual time saving change starts) when actually transitioning to the time saving state (special state). becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the first process, and the third process may not be executed. . As a result, control to an advantageous state is given priority over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of special conditions, so the result is not more advantageous to the player, and the player's interest in playing is reduced. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when variable display is started, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the numerical information becomes a specific value. After the variable display ends (the next variable starts, waiting for a customer), the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and when the updated numerical information reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number, the special information (special number reached) flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set), and when controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information concerned is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). You can. Thereby, by managing the special information, control for transitioning to the time saving state (special state) can be suitably executed.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and decides a variation pattern of symbol confirmation time that is different between when the special information is the first information and when the second information is the special information. You can do it like this. Thereby, when the variable display of the special number of times is performed, it becomes possible to suitably perform the effect.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process regarding variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special pattern process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is established. A third process for controlling to the original time saving state (special state) is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variation pattern) depending on whether the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value or the third numerical value when in the special state. . This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, game control becomes easier. Then, by changing the command according to the game state identified at that time, the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) can execute suitable performance control according to the game state.

(C14) During the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special drawing process flag is set to a fourth numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the third numerical value. By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated.

(C15) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special condition (variable number of display times). It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time saving state is reached after the end of the jackpot game state, a time saving state performance is performed in which the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time saving state is entered.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C16) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special display result (variable number of display times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (For example, the variation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the above special condition (variable display number of times is It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C18) During the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (When a jackpot is over, the time saving state is performed with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time saving state is reached after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 stores predetermined information ( A ram clear command at the time of a cold start, a command notifying the number of fluctuation display until the end of the time saving state at the time of a hot start) can be sent to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120, based on receiving the predetermined information, Suggestions regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on (so-called effects that suggest that the number of times the variable display is executed are different in the morning, the background image is different, and that within 100 revolutions variation is far or near) are executed. (e.g. easy to execute). Since the player is given an incentive to play first thing in the morning, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased and the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command that can specify information regarding the time saving state) to the performance control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the performance control CPU 120 It may be possible to perform a special performance (such as a performance suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled into a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. As the specific information, first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect information) and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). Good too. Thereby, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss, and it is possible to suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The performance control CPU 120 enters a time saving state (special state) when a special condition is satisfied based on the fact that variable display has been performed a first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, etc.) smaller than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for time-saving state suggestive effect control) that suggests that the control is to be performed, and before the variable display of the special number of times is executed, a second predetermined number of times (for example, Suggestive effects can be executed every time variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances (such as different performances when shifting to the time saving state) are performed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a condition and when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of a condition. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(C23) It is possible to back up and store various data including the numerical information when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances are executed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of conditions and after the time saving state (special state) is controlled (the performance after shifting to the time saving state is different, etc.). This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview presentation may be made different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving symbol, a jackpot, or a loss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention. Each configuration regarding the characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined with a part or all of the configurations regarding other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but it is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine (for example, a big bonus, The present invention is also applicable to slot machines that are equipped with one or more of regular bonuses, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonuses, etc.).

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%."

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General prize opening 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 13 Audio control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 9020 Special LED board 21 Gate switch 22A 1st starting port switch 22B 2nd starting port switch 23 Count Switch 24 V winning switch 30 Ball operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 35A Controller sensor unit 35B Push sensor 41 Passage gate 9050 4th symbol unit 81, 82, 83 Solenoid 100 Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102,122 RAM
103 CPU
104, 124 Random number circuit 106 RTC
110 Switch circuit 111 Output circuit 120 Production control CPU
123 Display control section

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
sound output means;
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
The display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area,
The specific performance is
The display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either an advantageous aspect or a disadvantageous aspect is announced as a performance result. including,
The performance execution means is
In the first display area, the effect video can be displayed,
In the second display area, information regarding the game can be displayed;
In the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a first speed in the first display area,
In the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effect animation in the effect mode that progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
In the third period,
When notifying an advantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area and the second display area are used to inform the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period. It is possible to notify the performance results in an advantageous manner,
When notifying a disadvantageous aspect as a performance result, the first display area is used to notify the disadvantageous performance result while the information display that was displayed in the second display area during the second period is displayed. It is possible and
In both the first period and the second period, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and in the second period, the light emitting means may be emitted at shorter intervals than in the first period. It is possible to change the light emission mode,
It is possible to perform a group effect that displays an image of multiple characters progressing as a group,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period,
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character starts in the group presentation until a new character is displayed and when the display of one of the characters ends first,
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new character is displayed and the display of the currently displayed character continues to end,
The third display period is a period in which the display of the currently displayed character continues without any new display of the character;
In the first display period, from a first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed, the part of the initially displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation, and in the second situation. A second situation appears in which part of the displayed character is displayed,
There is a first stage and a second stage with different production backgrounds,
The performance execution means is
When executing the group effect in the first stage, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a predetermined number of frames;
When executing the group effect in the second stage, the group effect can be executed such that the group effect starts from a specific number of frames different from a predetermined number of frames;
the degree of expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state when the group effect is executed in the first stage; the degree of expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state when the group effect is executed in the second stage; are different,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images